Sie sind auf Seite 1von 204

ZXG10-BSS

Base Station Subsystem


Operation Manual
(Radio Parameters)

Version 2.80

ZTE CORPORATION
ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South,
Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan District, Shenzhen,
P. R. China
518057
Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830
Fax: (86) 755 26772236
URL: http://support.zte.com.cn
E-mail: doc@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION

Copyright 2005 ZTE CORPORATION.

The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of
this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE
CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality
obligations.

All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.

This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are
disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-
infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on
the information contained herein.

ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the
subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its
licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein.

The contents of this document and all policies of ZTE CORPORATION, including without limitation policies related to support
or training are subject to change without notice.

Revision History

Date Revision No. Serial No. Description


2005/09/30 R1.0 sjzl20060086
ZTE CORPORATION
Values Your Comments & Suggestions!
Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product
documentation and offer better services to our customers.

Please fax to: (86) 755-26772236; or mail to Publications R&D Department, ZTE
CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.

Thank you for your cooperation!

Document
ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)
Name
Product Document
V2.80 R1.0
Version Revision Number
Equipment Installation Date

Presentation:
(Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization,
Appearance)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A
Your
evaluation of Accessibility:
this (Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)
documentation Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A

Intelligibility:
(Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)
Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A

Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation:
Improve the overview/introduction Make it more concise/brief
Improve the Contents Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information
Include more figures Make it less technical
Your Add more examples Add more/better quick reference aids
suggestions for Add more detail Improve the index
improvement
of this Other suggestions
documentation __________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.

If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:
Name Company
Postcode Address
Telephone E-mail
This page is intentionally blank.
Contents

About this Operation Manual ................................................................... ix


Purpose of this Operation Manual ............................................................................. x
Typographical Conventions ..................................................................................... xi
Mouse Operation Conventions................................................................................. xi
Safety Signs..........................................................................................................xii
How to Get in Touch ............................................................................................. xiii
Customer Support .............................................................................................................. xiii
Documentation Support ...................................................................................................... xiii

Chapter 1..................................................................................15
Overview................................................................................................ 15
Radio Resource Management................................................................................. 16
Precautions in Radio Parameters Adjustment .......................................................... 17

Chapter 2..................................................................................19
BS System Radio Parameters ................................................................ 19
BS Controller Parameters ...................................................................................... 20
Basic Property Parameters................................................................................................... 20
Timer Parameters ............................................................................................................... 24
GPRS Maximum Retrying Times Parameters ......................................................................... 46
GPRS Timer Parameters...................................................................................................... 49
Other GPRS Property Parameters......................................................................................... 52
Dynamic HR Property Parameters ........................................................................................ 57
BVC Flow Control Property Parameters ................................................................................. 58

BS Parameters ..................................................................................................... 60
External Cell Parameters ....................................................................................... 60
3G External Cell Parameters .................................................................................. 67

Chapter 3..................................................................................69
Cell Parameters ..................................................................................... 69
Basic Parameters 1 ............................................................................................... 70
Basic Parameters 2 ............................................................................................... 75
Optional Parameters ............................................................................................. 81
Cell Selection Parameters ...................................................................................... 85
Service Process Additional Parameters.................................................................... 90
System Parameters .............................................................................................. 96
Cell Optional Parameters ..................................................................................... 101
Other Parameters ............................................................................................... 104
GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters........................................................................ 107
GPRS NC Survey Parameters ............................................................................... 115
GPRS Cell Options Prameters ............................................................................... 119
GPRS Other Parameters ...................................................................................... 124
GPRS Channel Parameters................................................................................... 128
GPRS Power Control Parameters .......................................................................... 133
Dynamic HR Parameters ..................................................................................... 136

Chapter 4................................................................................139
Cell Object Parameters ........................................................................ 139
TRX Parameters ................................................................................................. 140
Interference Cell Parameters ............................................................................... 140
CA Frequency parameters ................................................................................... 141
Power Control Parameters ................................................................................... 142
Power Survey Parameters ................................................................................................. 142
Power Adjust Threshold Parameters ................................................................................... 145
Power Control Parameters ................................................................................................. 150
Other Parameters ............................................................................................................. 150
GPRS Power Control parameters ........................................................................................ 153

Handover Control Parameters .............................................................................. 156


Handover Pretreatment Parameters ................................................................................... 156
Handover Threshold Parameters ........................................................................................ 161
Handover Condition Parameters......................................................................................... 168
Handover Control Parameters............................................................................................ 171
Other Parameters ............................................................................................................. 172
Handover Arithmetic Parameters ....................................................................................... 174

Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters .............................................. 177


Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters...................................................................... 181
Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters ................................................................... 181
Frequency Hopping System Parameters................................................................ 182
Channel Parameters............................................................................................ 182
3G Cell Control Parameters.................................................................................. 185
Basic Property Parameters................................................................................................. 185
GPRS Property Parameters ................................................................................................ 190

3G Handover Control Parameters ......................................................................... 194


3G Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters .............................................................. 196
3G Handover Cell Parameters .............................................................................. 196
3G Handover and Reselection Parameters............................................................. 198

Figures.......................................................................................199

Tables ........................................................................................201
This page is intentionally blank.
About this Operation Manual

ZXG10 is a GSM mobile communication system independently developed


by ZTE Corporation. It is composed of ZXG10-MSS Mobile Switching
Subsystem and ZXG10-BSS Base Station Subsystem. Providing and
managing radio transmission in GSM, ZXG10-BSS comprises of
equipments such as ZXG10-BSC Base Station Controller and ZXG10-BTS
Base Transceiver Station.

ZXG10-BSC (V2) is 2nd generation base station controller product of ZTE.


It has large capacity, high reliability, high cost-performance ratio, perfect
functions and strong service supporting capability.

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) consists of ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station


Controller and ZXG10-BTS Base Transceiver Station (a generic term for
ZTE series BTSs).

ZXG10-OMCR (V2.80) is the operation and maintenance platform for


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem.

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio


Parameters) introduces parameters of ZXG10-OMCR (V2.80) system
related to radio devices and radio resource. It works with ZXG10-BSS
(V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Configuration
Management).

This set of document contains following manuals:

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Guide to Documentation

2nd Generation Mobile Communication Technology Basic Knowledge

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Technical Manual

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Hardware Manual

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Installation Manual


(Hardware)

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Installation Manual (Software)

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Installation Manual (System


Debugging)

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem NM Technical Manual

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION ix


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual


(Configuration Management)

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Fault


Management)

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual


(Performance Management)

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual


(Performance Measurement Counter)

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Security


Management & System Tool)

ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Command Manual

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Maintenance Manual


(Troubleshooting)

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Maintenance Manual Routing


Maintenance)

ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) Base Station Controller Maintenance Manual


(Emergency Maintenance)

In this manual, BSC (V2) is for ZXG10-BSC (V2.80) in short, BSS (V2) for
ZXG10-BSS and OMCR (V2) for ZXG10-OMCR (V2.80).

Purpose of this Operation Manual


This manual falls into four chapters:

Chapter 1, Overview, introduces types, management and precautions of


OMCR (V2) radio parameters.

Chapter 2, BS System Radio Parameters, introduces all parameters of


OMCR (V2) base station controller.

Chapter 3, Cell Parameters, introduces all radio parameters of OMCR (V2)


cells, including basic parameters, optional feature parameters, cell optional
parameters, service process additional parameters, system parameters
and other parameters related to GPRS.

Chapter 4, Cell Object Parameters, introduces all object parameters of


OMCR (V2), including parameters of TRX, interference cell, CA frequency,
power control, handover control, adjacent cells handover and reselection,
frequency hopping system, channels and parameters related to 3G
services.

x Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


About this Operation Manual

Typographical Conventions
ZTE documents employ with the following typographical conventions.

T ABLE 1 TYPOGR APHICAL CONVENTIONS

Typeface Meaning
Italics References to other guides and documents.
Quotes Links on screens.
Bold Menus, menu options, function names, input fields, radio
button names, check boxes, drop-down lists, dialog box
names, window names.
CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company
name.
Constant width Text that you type, program code, files and directory names,
and function names.
[] Optional parameters
{} Mandatory parameters
| Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it

Note: Provides additional information about a certain topic.

Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be


checked before proceeding further.

Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier or


more productive for the reader.

Mouse Operation Conventions


T ABLE 2 M OUSE OPERATION CONVENTIONS

Typeface Meaning
Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left
mouse button) once.
Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually
the left mouse button) twice.
Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the
right mouse button) once.
Drag Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the
mouse.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION xi


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Safety Signs
T ABLE 3 S AFETY S IGNS

Safety Signs Meaning


Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal
word must be limited to only extreme situations.

Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if


not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also
be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Erosion: Beware of erosion.

Electric shock: There is a risk of electric shock.

Electrostatic: The device may be sensitive to static electricity.

Microwave: Beware of strong electromagnetic field.

Laser: Beware of strong laser beam.

No flammables: No flammables can be stored.

No touching: Do not touch.

No smoking: Smoking is forbidden.

xii Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


About this Operation Manual

How to Get in Touch


The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for
the documentation and the software.

Customer Support
If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding
your product, contact us by e-mail at support@zte.com.cn. You can also
call our customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-
9830-9830.

Documentation Support
ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and
usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or
suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at
doc@zte.com.cn; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86)
755 26772236. You can also explore our website at
http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like
documentation, knowledge base, forum and service request.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION xiii


Chapter 1

Overview

In this chapter, you will learn about:


Radio Resource Management
Precautions in Radio Parameters Adjustment

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 15


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

900/1800 MHz TDMA digital cell mobile communication system (GSM) is


an integrated system covering fields of network technology, digital stored
program control technology, all transmission technologies and radio
technologies. GSM usually falls into Network Sub System (NSS), Base
Station Sub-system (BSS) and Mobile Station (MS). GSM system, in
signaling structure, usually covers MAP interface, A interface (between
MSC and BSC), Abis interface (between BSC and BTS0 and Um interface
(between BTS and MS, also called air interface). All these objects and
interfaces contain large quantity of configuration parameters and property
parameters, some of which are determined during the development and
producing of the equipment, and most of which depend on actual need and
operation by network providers. Settings and adjustment of latter
parameters have a great impact on the operation of entire GSM network.

Radio parameters in GSM network refer to parameters related to radio


devices and radio resources. These parameters have an important impact
on cover of cells, distribution of signaling flow and service property of
network, etc. therefore, adjusting radio parameters reasonably plays a
very important part in GSM network optimization. GSM radio parameters,
according to objects radio parameters serve in the network, fall into
project parameters and resource (cell) parameters. Project parameters
refer to parameters related to design, installation and commissioning of
the project, like antenna height, antenna direction, antenna gain, antenna
download obliquity and cable loss, etc. These parameters must be
determined in network design and are seldom changed during the
operation of the network. Resource (cell) parameters refer to parameters
related to configuration and utilization of radio resource, which usually
transmit on radio interface (Um) to keep the consistence of base station
and mobile station. Radio parameters covered in this manual are mainly
resource parameters.

Radio Resource Management


Radio resource objects in BSC: Base Station Controller (BSC), SITE, Base
Transceiver Station (BTS), Transceiver (TRX), Radio Carrier
(RADIOCARRIER), Logic Service Channel (CHAN), Handover Channel
(HOC), Power Control Parameter (POC), Adjacent Handover Cell
(AHANDOVERCELL), Adjacent Reselection Cell (ARESELECTCELL), Adjacent
Handover and Reselection Cell (AHO&RESELECTCELL), Interference Cell
(ICELL), Logic PCM (PCMCIRCUIT), Logic Lapd (LAPDLINK), Frequency
Hopping System (FHS), GPRS Cell (GPRSCELL), BVC Flow Control
(BVCflowCtrl), 2G/3G Cell handover Control (2G/3GHOC) and Dynamic HR
(DynaHR).

Select Configuration Management Radio Resource Management


from main interface of OMCR (V2) (as shown in Figure 1) after successful
login, and ZXG10 Radio Resource Management interface pops up.

16 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 1 - Overview

FIGURE 1 M AIN INTERF ACE

The main interface shows three windows: tree in the left window shows
objects to be created and maintained, right window describes relationship
between BSC and SITE giving logical illustration, and the window below
shows the man-machine command MMI command created by the
operations. The status bar shows linking status with server and machine
number of the client terminal.

Precautions in Radio Parameters


Adjustment
Radio parameters adjustment, according to property of the problem to be
solved, fall into two kinds. The first kind is to solve static problem, that is,
to correct traffic model in system design by measuring actual average
traffic and signaling flow in every district and to solve common problems
existing for long. The other kind is to solve problems in some time like
traffic overload in some district, channel congestion due to sudden events
or random events.

Service provides must perform measurement and summarization on actual


operation regularly, and then perform appropriate adjustment on global or
partial parameters and configurations, for first kind. Network operators
adjust some radio parameters at real time according to instant data from
measurement personnel, for second kind.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 17


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Most radio parameters in GSM system are based on one cell or one district.
It is necessary to consider whether parameter adjustment in this district
will influence other districts, especially adjacent one, for parameters
between districts are related to each other greatly. Otherwise, it may
cause bad influence. Determine whether the problem results from
equipment fault (including connections) first when it occurs in some part
of the network. Adjust radio parameters only when determining that the
problem does result from service.

18 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2

BS System Radio Parameters

In this chapter, you will learn about:


BS Controller Parameters
BS Parameters
External Cell Parameters
3G External Cell Parameters

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 19


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

BS Controller Parameters
Basic Property Parameters
1. BSCID
Description: To uniquely identify a BSC
Value range: 1 ~ 255
2. Alias
Description: BSC alias
3. Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Description: Consisting of three decimal scale numbers, to uniquely
identify the home country of the mobile subscriber (or system)
Value range: 0 ~ 999
Default value: 460
4. Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Description: Consisting of two decimal scale numbers, to uniquely
identifies a specific GSM PLMN network in a country (decided by MCC)
Value range: 0 ~ 99
Default value: 0
5. LoadValidTime (10 s)
Description: To periodically send BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message
to MSC during load indication, notifying it of the load status. The
message consists of time indication information and indicating valid
time length of the service load information. The MSC notifies
neighboring BSC of the information in the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION
message. These parameters are to indicate valid time length of the
load information.
Value range: See Table 4 for value range of LoadValidTime.

T ABLE 4 V ALUE RANGE OF L OADV ALID TIME

Value Meaning
0 Reserved
1 Valid in 10 s

254 Valid in 2540 s


255 Valid permanently

Default value: 5

20 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

6. LoadIndPrd (100ms)
Description: To periodically send BSSAP LOAD INDICATION message
to MSC during load indication, notifying it of the load status. The
message consists of time indication information and indicating valid
time length of the service load information. The MSC notifies the
neighboring BSC of the information in the BSSAP LOAD INDICATION
message. This parameter determines the period for BSC to send the
load indication message when the load indication message is sent
periodically.
Value range: See Table 5 for value of load indication period.

T ABLE 5 V ALUE T ABLE OF L OAD INDIC ATION PERIOD

Value Duration Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s


65535 6553.5 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 600


7. OverLevel[13][6] (13*6 = 78)
Description: To define flow control policy for a specific cell
Value range: See Table 6 for value range of flow control.

T ABLE 6 V ALUE RANGE OF OVERLEVEL

Overload Barred Class Rxlev_ Access Penalty Cell select Tx- Max-
Level Number _Min Time Offset Integer Retrans
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 -1(255)
2 0 1 0 0 2 -2(254)
3 1 2 0 -2(254) 3 -3(253)
4 2 3 0 -3(253) 4 -3(253)
5 3 4 0 -4(252) 4 -3(253)
6 4 4 0 -4(252) 4 -3(253)
7 5 4 11111 -3(253) 4 -3(253)
8 6 4 11111 -2(254) 4 -3(253)
9 7 4 11111 -1(255) 4 -3(253)
10 8 4 11111 0 4 -3(253)
11 9 4 11111 0 4 -3(253)
12 10 4 11111 0 4 -3(253)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 21


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

8. InHoEnable
Description: To define whether to allow handover between cells inside
a BSC. BSS supports internal handover inside a cell (handover between
different channels within a same cell) and handover between cells
controlled by MSC. It can also support handover between different cells
inside BSS. This can be set via OMS. Internal handover between
different cells of a BSS can reduce messages between BSS and MSC
because message will not be sent to MSC before the execution of
handover. Only after a handover is completed, will BSS send the
HANDOVER EXECUTION message to MSC.
Value range: True/False
Default value: True
9. LocName
Description: Name of geographic location of a Base Station Controller
10. ResourceIndThs
Description: A threshold value that BSC automatically indicates to
MSC, and ratio of present available channels to the total channels. This
parameter is for the threshold of automatic indication mode. The
resource indication configured by O&M must be given to MSC when
available cell resources are less than the parameter, to notify the cell
condition. There are four modes during the resource indication by BSC.
BSC instantly returns a message of BSSAP RESOURCE
INDICATION as an acknowledgement without any resource
information after receiving the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST
message. BSC automatically sends the BSSAP RESUORCE
INDICATION message to MSC, and uses the Periodicity IE in the
BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST to determine the indication
messages interval (unless the Periodicity IE is 0 and BSC will
ignore 0) once the auto condition (service threshold or the interval
between any two messages) set by O&M of BSC is satisfied.
BSC instantly returns a message BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION
with resource information after receiving BSSAP RESOURCE
REQUEST message. BSC will stop sending and will wait for the
next BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST if the BSSAP RESOURCE
REQUEST message does not contain the Extended Resource
Indication IE. BSC will follow the rules specified by the
Subsequent Mode element in the message if so, which are the
same as those of mode 4. Mode 1 or 3 is adopted if previous mode
is 1 or 3. Otherwise, mode 4 applies.
BSC will immediately return a BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION
message containing resource information after receiving the
BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message. BSC then periodically
sends BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION messages. Period to send
the message is the value of Periodicity IE times 100ms if the
Periodicity IE in the BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST message is not
0. The message is wrong and the entire BSSAP RESOURCE
REQUEST message is regarded as invalid if Periodicity IE is 0.
BSC instantly returns a message BSSAP RESOURCE INDICATION
as an acknowledgement without any resource information after

22 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

receiving the message BSSAP RESOURCE REQUEST. Cell resource


information will not be sent to MSC.
Value range: See Table 7 for value range of ResourceIndThs.

T ABLE 7 V ALUE RANGE OF RESOURCEI NDTHS

Value Meaning
0 0%
1 1%


100 100%

Default value: 30
11. BSCMaxResetNum
Description: Maximum number of repeating times for BSC resetting. It
will repeat entire resetting process when BSC sends the BSSAP
RESET message to MSC and if the BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGE
message sent by MSC has not been received in a specified T4 time.
The BSSAP RESET message can be repeated up to N times. MSC will
end the resetting process and inform OMS if no reply is obtained after
sending N messages. N depends on BscMaxResetNum parameter.
Default value: 3
12. CircMaxResetNum
Description: Maximum number of repeating times for BSC circuit
resetting. It will repeat circuit resetting process when BSC sends the
BSSAP RESET CIRCUIT message to MSC and if the BSSAP RESET
CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDG message has not been received in the GSM-
specified T19 time. The BSSAP RESET CIRCUIT message can be
repeated up to N times. MSC will end the resetting process and inform
OMS if no reply is obtained after N times. N depends on
CircMaxResetNum parameter.
Default value: 3
13. ConfusionMsg
Description: To determine whether to allow BSC to send the BSSAP
CONFUSION message. This message is bi-directional, indicating that
the received message cannot be correctly processed due to
unidentified reasons. A confusion message will be sent while there are
no other suitable fault messages to return,
Value range: True: Enabling BSC to send BSSAP CONFUSION
messages; False: Disabling BSC to send BSSAP CONFUSION messages
Default value: False
14. ExDRSendAssignFail
Description: To determine whether to allow external customized retry
to send failure indication

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 23


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: True/False


Default value: False
15. LoadInd
Description: To define whether the load indication process can be used.
The load indication process is an optional item which enables
neighboring BSCs to know their cell load conditions outside their
boundary, so that even more information can be consulted during a
common handover and during intra-BSC traffic handover. This
parameter decides whether load indication process can be used,
meanwhile the validity of parameters LoadValidTime and
LoadIndPrd are determined, that is, when the parameter is 0 (the
load indication process cannot be used), the two parameters followed
are invalid, otherwise, they will be valid.
Value range: True: Available to load indication process; False:
Unavailable to load indication process
Default value: False
16. BARANG
Description: To define broadcast range
Value range: Basic GSM900 frequency band P-GSM is ARFCN 1124,
the expanded GSM900 frequency band E-GSM is ARFCN 0124 and
9751023, GSM1800 frequency band is ARFCN 512885, and railway
GSM900 frequency band R-GSM is ARFCN 0124 and 9551023.

Timer Parameters
1. Blocking/unblocking period
Description: BSS blocks/unblocks a land circuit and sends
BLOCK/UNBLOCK message to MSC due to various reasons (O&M
intervention, equipment failure/recovery, radio resources
unavailable/available to name a few). A BLOCK/UNBLOCK
ACKNOWLEDGE message is sent to BSS after receiving the message.
This time period is defined as T1.
Value range: 1 ~ 200
See Table 8 for value range of blocking/unblocking period.

T ABLE 8 V ALUE RANGE OF BLOCKING/UNBLOCKING PERIOD

Code Time Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s

1200 120 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 80

24 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

2. T4: Global resetting period


Description: T4 is to monitor the message BSSAP RESET sent by BSC
to MSC
Timer start conditions: T4 is started when BSC is reset globally
Timer suspend conditions: receiving BSSAP RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE messages from MSC
Timeout action: BSC will repeat the process if timeout occurs in T4
Value range: 100 ~ 1200
See Table 9 for value range of global resetting period.

T ABLE 9 V ALUE RANGE OF GLOBAL RESETTING PERIOD

T4 Time Represented
100 10 s
101 10.1 s
102 10.2 s

1200 120 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 100


3. T7: protective period for handover request
Description: T7 monitors the BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED message.
It is maxmium period taken from the time when BSC sends BSSAP
HANDOVER REQIURED message to the time when MSC returns the
BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND message. MSC can send the BSSAP
HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message to BSC in the case of failure
and so the BSC will stop the T7 timer
Timer start conditions: T7 is started when BSC sends BSSAP
HANDOVER REQUIRED to MSC
Timer end conditions: receiving BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND or
BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message. BSC can send
other BSSAP HANDOVER REQIURED messages to MSC when the
BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message is received
BSC will instantly repeat the process of HANDOVER REQUIRED if
T7 is timeout but external handover conditions are still satisfied
Value range: 50 ~ 300
See Table 10 for value range of protective period of handover request.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 25


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 10 V ALUE RANGE OF PROTECTIVE PERIOD FOR HANDOVER REQUEST

T7 Time Represented
50 5s
51 5.1 s
52 5.2 s


300 30 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 100


4. T8: source BSC handover execution period
Description: The external handover process for T8 supervision source
BSC
Timer start conditions: T8 is started when the BSSAP HANDOVER
COMMAND message is received
The T8 timer will stop upon receiving the BSSAP CLEAR
COMMAND message or the RIL3_RR HANDOVER FAILURE
message from MSC
BSC will send BSSAP CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC when the
T8 timer is timeout
Value range: 80 ~ 150
See Table 11 for value range of source BSC handover executive period.

T ABLE 11 V ALUE RANGE OF SOURCE BSC H ANDOVER EXECUTION P ERIOD

T8 Time Represented
80 8s
81 8.1 s
82 8.2 s

150 15 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 120


5. T10: Assigned period
Description: T10 supervises the assigned process
Timer start conditions: T10 is started when the ASSIGNMENT
COMMAND message is sent to MS
Timer end conditions: T10 timer stops when MS receives the
ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE and ASSIGNMENT FAILURE messages.

26 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

BSC sends a BSSAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message to MSC


when T10 timer expires
Value range: 40 ~140
See Table 12 for value range of assignment period.

T ABL E 12 V AL UE R AN G E OF AS S IG NM EN T PE RIO D

T10 Time Represented


40 4s
41 4.1 s
42 4.2 s


140 14 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 80
6. T13: Protective period for global resetting
Description: T13 is a protection time for a local call clearing process
Timer start conditions: T8 timer is started when the BSSAP
HANDOVER COMMAND message is received
Timer suspend conditions: SCCP receives a SSP/SPI message
BSS sends BSSAP RESET ACKNOWLEDGEMENT message to MSC
when T13 timer expires
Value range: 50 ~ 300
See Table 13 for value range of protective period of global resetting.

T ABLE 13 V ALUE RANGE OF PROTECTIVE PERIOD FOR GLOBAL RESETTING

T13 Time Represented


50 5s
51 5.1 s
52 5.2 s

300 30 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 150


7. T17: first overload period for flow control
Description: T17 timer supervises the flow control process of MSC
overload

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 27


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Timer start conditions: T8 timer is started when the BSSAP


HANDOVER COMMAND message is received
Stop conditions for the timer: None.
Timeout action: BSC observes whether to receive message BSSAP
OVERLOAD from the MSC when timer T17 expires.
Value range: 10 ~ 100
See Table 14 for value range of first overload period of flow control.

T ABLE 14 V ALUE RANGE OF FIRST OVERLOAD PERIOD OF FLOW CONTROL

T17 Time Represented


10 1s
11 1.1 s
12 1.2 s

100
10 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 80
8. T18: second overload period for flow control
Description: T18 timer supervises the flow control process of MSC
overload
Timer start conditions: T18 timer is started and the service is
degraded by one level when BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND
message is received
Stop conditions of the timer: none
Timeout action: The service is upgraded by one level when the T18
timer expires
Value range: 30 ~ 200
See Table 15 for value range of second overload period of flow control.

T ABLE 15 V ALUE RANGE OF SECOND OVERLOAD P ERIOD OF F LOW CONTROL

T18 Time Represented


30 3s
31 3.1 s

200 20 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 150

28 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

9. T19: circuit resetting period at the BSS side


Description: The circuits, with the exception of BSC SCCP connection,
must be released to idle state, and BSS will send the BSSAP CIRCUIT
RESET message to MSC to start the timer T19. MSC releases
corresponding services, setting circuits to the idle state and sends
BSSAP CIRCUIT RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message to BSC, after
receiving the message. The Timer will stop upon receiving the RESET
CIRCUIT ACKNOWLEDGE message from BSC.
Value range: 1 ~ 1200
See Table 16 for value range of circuit resetting period at BSS side.

T ABLE 16 V ALUE RANGE OF CIRCUIT RESETTING PERIOD AT BSS SIDE

Code Time Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s


1200 120 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 80
10. T20: circuit group blocking/unblocking period
Description: BSS will block a group of terrestrial circuits for various
reasons (O&M intervention; equipment fault/recovery; radio resources
unavailable/available to name a few). It then sends the BSSAP
CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK message to the MSC. MSC will
send the BSSAP CIRCIUIT GROUP BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACKNOWKEDGE
message to BSS for notification after receiving the message.
Value range: 1 ~ 1200
See Table 17 for value range of circuit group blocking/unblocking
period.

T ABLE 17 V ALUE RANGE OF CIRCUIT GROUP BLOCKING/ UNBLOCKING P ERIOD

Code Time Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s

1200 120 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 80

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 29


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

11. T9101: supervises the RLSD message receiving


Description: T9101 timer supervises the RLSD message receiving.
Timer start conditions: T7 timer is started when BSC sends BSSAP
HANDOVER REQUIRED to MSC
Timer suspend conditions: T9101 timer stops when the R L S D
message sent by MSC is received
Timeout action: BSC will send the R L S D message to release the
S C C P connection when T9101 timer expires

Value range: 100


See Table 18 for value range of T9101.

T ABLE 18 V ALUE RANGE OF T9101

T9101 Time Represented


100 10 s
Other values Reserved

Settings: cannot be changed


12. T9103: supervises the channel activation process
Description: Timer T9103 is to monitor channel activation process
Timer start conditions: the timer T9103 starts when BSC sends the
CHANNEL ACTIVATION message to BTS
Timer suspend condition: timer T9103 starts when BSC receives
the CHANNEL ACTIVATION ACK or CHANNEL ACTIVATION
NACK, message
BSC sends the RF CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS when the
timer T9103 expires
Value range: 20
See Table 19 for value range of T9103.

T A B L E 1 9 V A L U E R AN G E O F T 9 1 0 3

RmsT9103 Time Represented


20 2s
Other values Reserved

Settings: cannot be changed


13. T9104: supervises the CLEAR COMMAND from MSC
Description: The T9104 timer supervises CLEAR COMMAND from MSC
Timer start conditions: timer T9104 is started when BSC sends a
CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC

30 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

Timer suspend conditions: Timer T9104 stops when the CLEAR


COMMAND message sent by MSC is received
Resend the CLEAR REQUEST (four times at most) message when
the timer T9104 expires
Value range: 50 ~ 200
See Table 20 for value range of T9104.

T ABLE 20 V ALUE RANG E OF T9104

T9104 Time Represented


50 5s


200 20 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 150


14. T9105: supervises the SCCP connection process
Description: The timer T9105 is to monitor SCCP connection process
Timer start conditions: Timer T9105 is started when BSC sends the
BSSAP SCCP_CONNECTION_REQ message to MSC
Timer suspend conditions: Timer T9105 stops when BSC receives
SCCP_CONNECTION_CONFIRM/SCCP_CONNECTION_REFUSED
message
BSC will send the CHANNEL RELEASE message to MS when the
timer T9105 expires
Value range: 20 ~ 2400
See Table 21 for value range of T9105.

T ABLE 21 V ALUE RANGE OF T9105

T9105 Time Represented


20 2s

2400 240 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 100


15. T9108: supervises physical context request process
Description: The timer T9108 is to monitor the physical context
request process
Timer start conditions: T9108 timer is started when BSC sends the
PHYSICAL CONTEXT REQUEST message to BTS

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 31


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Timer suspend conditions: T9108 timer stops when BSC receives


the PHYSICAL CONTEX CONFIRM message from BTS
Timeout action: BSC will send ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message to
MSC when the T9108 timer expires
Value range: 20
See Table 22 for value range of T9108.

T ABLE 22 V ALUE RANGE OF T9108

T9108 Time Represented


20 2s
Other values Reserved

Settings: cannot be changed


16. T9113: supervises the external handover in the destination cell
Description: The timer T9113 is to monitor the external handover in
the destination cell
Timer start conditions: T9113 timer is started when BSC sends the
HANDOVER REQUEST ACK message to MSC
Timer suspend conditions: T9113 timer stops when BSC receives a
HANDOVER COMPLETE message from MS or the CLEAR
COMMAND message from the MSC
BSC will send the CLEAR REQUEST message to MSC when the
T9113 timer expires
Value range: 80 ~ 150
See Table 23 for value range of T9113.

T ABLE 23 V ALUE RANGE OF T9113

T9113 Time Represented


80 8s
81 8.1 s

150 15 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 130


17. zxgT1: protection time for channel activation
Description: The protection time waiting for MS access during
assignment or handover after the channel is activated

32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

Timer start conditions: target channels receive the CHL


ACTIVATION ACK message and sends RADIO AVAILABLE
message
Timer suspend conditions: MS accesses and the target channel
receives the ASSIGNMENT COM or the HANDOVER COM
message
Value range: 50 ~ 120
See Table 24 for value range of zxgT1.

T ABLE 24 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T1

Value Time Represented


50 5.1 s
51 5.1 s


120 12.0 s

Default value: 70
18. zxgT2: protection time for applying a channel
Description: The protection time for applying a channel
Timer start conditions: new channels send RADIO APPLY message
Channel request succeeds and the new channel receives the
RADIO AVAILABLE message or the channel request fails and the
new channel receives RADIO UNAVAILABLE message or in case of
queuing, the new channel receives RADIO PROCEEDING message
Value range: 10 ~ 50
See Table 25 for value range of zxgT2.

T ABLE 25 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T2

Value Time Represented


10 1.0 s
11 1.1 s

50 5.0 s

Note: T2 > T3103


Default value: 30
19. zxgT3: protection time for linking response
Description: The protection time waiting for the linking response of the
central module during instant assignment,

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 33


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Timer start conditions: Pn instance sends the ESTABLISH IND


message to the P0 instance
Timer suspend conditions: Pn instance receives CONNECT CONF
message sent by the P0 instance, or CONNECT FAIL message
when P0 fails to establish a link.
Value range: 50 ~ 650
See Table 26 for value range of zxgT3.

T ABLE 26 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T3

Value Time Represented


50 5.0 s
51 5.1 s


650 65.0 s

Note: T3 > T9105


Default value: 120
20. zxgT4 (100 ms)
Description: The protective waiting time for the confirmation by P0
instance to the HO COM or ASS COM message
Pn instance transfers the message to instance P0 after Pn instance
receives the HO COM or ASS COM2 message from MS
Timer suspend conditions: Pn instance receives from P0 a
confirmation message for HO COM or ASS COM
Value range: 50 ~ 650
Default value: 30
21. zxgT5: supervises the modification process of encryption mode
Description: T5 timer supervises the modification process of encryption
mode
Timer start conditions: the zxgT5 timer starts when BSC receives
the CIPHER MODE COMMAND message from MSC
Timer suspend conditions: the zxgT5 timer stops when BSC
receives the CIPHER MODE COMPLETE message from MS
Timeout action: when the zxgT5 timer expires, the BSSAP CIPHER
MODE REJECT message is sent to MSC
Value range: 50 ~ 120
See Table 27 for value range of zxT5.

34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

T ABLE 27 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T5

Value Time Represented


50 5.0 s
51 5.1 s


120 12.0 s

Default value: 100


22. zxgT6: supervises the SAPI3 linking
Description: The zxgT6 timer supervises the SAPI3 link establishment
Timer start conditions: the zxgT6 timer starts when BSC receives
the DTAP (SAPI=3) message from MSC and there is no SAP13.
Timer suspend conditions: the zxgT6 timer is suspended when BSC
receives the ESTABLISH CONFIRM message from BTS
BSSMAP SAPI n REJECT message will be sent to MSC when the
zxgT6 timer expires
Value range: 10 ~ 300
See Table 28 for value range of zxgT6.

T ABLE 28 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T6

Value Time Represented


10 1.0 s
11 1.1 s

300 30.0 s

Default value: 100


23. zxgT7: the protection time waiting for the message of P0 response
assignment or handover completion
Description: The protection time waiting for the message of P0
response assignment or handover completion
Timer start conditions: Pn instance sends the HO RQD message to
the P0 instance
Timer suspend conditions: Pn instance receives the response
message HO CMD from the P0 instance
Value range: 1 ~ 200
See Table 29 for value range of zxgT7.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 35


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 29 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T7

Value Time Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s


200 20.0 s

Default value: 100


24. zxgT8 (100 ms)
Description: External handover protection time
Value range: 1650
Default value: 100
25. zxgT9
Description: RF Channel Release protection time
Timer start conditions: zxgT9 timer starts when the Pn instance
sends the RF CHL REL message to the BTS when it is released
Timer stop conditions: zxgT9 timer expires when the Pn instance
receives a response from the BTS
Value range: 10 ~ 50
See Table 30 for value range of zxgT9.

T ABLE 30 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T9

Value Time Represented


10 1.0 s
11 1.1 s

50 5.0 s

Default value: 20
26. zxgT10: The protection time for queuing requested by a channel
Description: The protection time for queuing requested by a channel
Value range: 50 ~ 200
See Table 31 for value range of zxgT10.

36 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

T ABLE 31 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T10

Value Time Represented


50 5.0 s
51 5.1 s


200 20.0 s

Note: T10 > T3109 + T3111 + T9103 or T10 > T11 /Tqho must be
ensured if queuing is allowed
Default value: 130
27. zxgT11: Assignment for queue period
Description: Maximum allowable queue time is calculated from the
assignment request
Value range: 1 ~ 150
See Table 32 for value range zxgT11.

T ABLE 32 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T11

Value Time Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s

150 15 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 60
28. zxgT12: interval for periodic status acknowledgement (100 ms)
Description: interval for periodic status acknowledgement
Timer starts fir the first time after Pn instance receives CONNECT
CONF message from P0 instance and decides to perform activity
check at peer end. It will then be started periodically
Pn instance receives the release type message
Value range: 10018000
Default value: 200
29. zxgT13: supervises the mode modifying procedure of BTS and MS
Description: zxgT13 timer supervises the modification process of BTS
and MS modes.
Timer start conditions: the BSC sends the MODE MODIFY
message messageto BTS or sends the CHANNEL MODE MODIFY
message to MS

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 37


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Timer stop conditions: BSC receives the MODE MODIFY


ACK/NACK message from BTS and the CHANNEL MODE MODIFY
message from MS
BSSAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message is sent to MSC when
zxgT3 timer expires
Value range: 1 ~ 200
See Table 33 for value range of zxgT13.

T ABLE 33 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T13

Value Time Represented


50 5.0 s
51 5.1 s


120 12.0 s

Default value: 100


30. zxgT14 (100 ms)
Description: From the time when Ass/Ho Com is sent by destination
instance to the time when Ass/Ho Com Ack is received.
Value range: 50 ~ 120
Default value: 60
31. zxgT15: the usable time waiting for resources by the destination
instance when disconnecting forcefully
Description: The usable time waiting for resources by the destination
instance when disconnecting forcefully
Timer start conditions: when a destination instance needs to be
disconnected, a PREEMPT APPLY message is sent to the
disconnected object
Timer stop conditions: when a destination instance receives the
response RESOURCE AVAILABLE message for the disconnected
object indicating resource availability
Value range: 60 ~ 120
See Table 34 for value range of zxgT1.

T ABLE 34 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T1

Value Time Represented


60 6.0 s
61 6.1 s

120 12.0 s

38 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

Note: T15 > T3109 (10) + T3111 (0.1)


Default value: 60
32. zxgT16: the waiting time for oriented reattempt
Description: The waiting time for oriented reattempt
Value range: 20 ~ 60
See Table 35 for value range of zxgT6.

T ABLE 35 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXG T6

Value Time Represented


20 2s
21 2.1 s


60 6s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 20
33. rmsTqho: handover queue period
Description: Maxmium allowable queue time for handover attempt,
calculated from the handover request
Value range: 1 ~ 150
See Table 36 for value range of rmsTqho.

T ABLE 36 V ALUE RANGE OF RMS TQHO

Value Time Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s

150 15 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 60
34. zxgmT7: external handover protection time
Description: External handover protection time. BSS will receive the
HO REJECT message from MSC after requesting for external
handover. BSS must wait for (zxgmT7) time before it can receive other
commands related to handover request. zxgmT7 < T7.
Value range: 1 ~ 65535
See Table 37 for value range of zxgmT7.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 37 V ALUE RANGE OF ZXGM T7

Value Time Represented


1 0.1 s
2 0.2 s


65535 6553.5 s

Default value: 100


35. zxgmT11 (100 ms)
Description: A clock is adopted when flow control is performed due to
cell overload. This clock is together with zxgmT12 timer to modify the
ACCESS CONTROL parameter configured in the cell, and notify this in
system information to MS, therefore to achieve flow control. The value
of the clock must be less than zxgmT12 timer.
Value range: 50200
Default value: 100
36. zxgmT12 (100 ms)
Description: A clock is adopted when flow control is performed due to
cell overload. This clock is together with the zxgmT11 timer to modify
the ACCESS CONTROL parameter configured in the cell, and notify
this in the system information to MS, therefore to achieve flow control.
The value of the clock must be greater than zxgmT11 timer. The
process of the two clocks controlling their cell traffic: the system
degrades the traffic level and starts the zxgmT11 and zxgmT12 timer
after the network receives an overload message for the first time. The
OVERLOAD message occurring during the zxgmT11 timer will be
ignored. The flow will be decreased one more level and the zxgmT11
and zxgmT12 timer will be restarted if the OVERLOAD message is
received between zxgmT11 and zxgmT12 timer. The flow level will be
increased, and the zxgmT12 timer will be restarted if the zxgmT12
timer still does not receive the OVERLOAD message after the
zxgmT12 timer expires. Figure 2 shows the illustration for the two
clocks that control cell flow

40 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

FIGURE 2 I LLUSTRATION FOR TWO CLOCKS TO CONTROL CELL F LOW

BTS BSC

overload

zxgmT11
overload
zxgmT12

overload

Value range: 100 ~ 300


Default value: 150
37. Tmicro: the delay timer for micro-micro handover
Description: A delay time length value is necessary (the timer value) in
the micro-micro handover control. Related timer will be started when a
call enters a micro cell. The neighboring micro cell in the same layer
can be used as an alternative cell only when the timer expires. In this
way, the fast moving mobiles staying in the micro cell layer can be
avoided.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535
See Table 38 for value range of Tmiirco.

T ABLE 38 V ALUE RANGE OF TMIRCO

Value Time Represented


0 0s
1 0.1 s

65535 6553.5 s

Default value: 100


The setting of this parameter is related to standard to measure
average size of the micro cell and moving speed of a cell phone
38. T3101: instantly assign a period
Description: T3101 supervises the instantly assigned process
Timer start conditions: T3101 timer starts when BSC sends
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 41


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Timer suspend conditions: the T3101 timer stops when MS receives


ESTABLISH INDICATION message
BSC will send CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS when the
T3101 timer expires
Value range: 10 ~ 50
See Table 39 for value range of T3101.

T ABLE 39 V ALUE RANGE OF T3101

Value Time Represented


10 1s
11 1.1 s
12 1.2 s


50 5s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 30
39. T3103: source cell handover period
Description: T3101 timer supervises internal handover process of BSC
Timer start conditions: the T3101 timer starts when BSC sends the
HANDOVER COMMAND message to MS
The T3101 expires when BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE
message on a new channel or the HANDOVER FAILURE message
on an old channel from MS
Timeout action: CLEAR REQUEST message will be sent to MSC
when the timer T3103 expires, and a new channel is released
Value range: 35 ~ 100
See Table 40 for value range of T3103.

T ABLE 40 V ALUE RANGE OF T3103

Value Time Represented


35 3.5 s
36 3.6 s
37 3.7 s

100 10 s
Other values Reserved

Note: T3103 < T10 when setting this timer


Default value: 60

42 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

40. T3107: assigned period


Description: T3107 is to supervise assignment period and internal
handover of a cell (< T10)
Timer start conditions: the T3107 timer is started when BSC sends
the RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message to MS
Timer stop conditions: the T3107 timer expires when BSC receives
the RIL3_RR ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE message or the RIL3_RR
ASSIGNMENT FAILURE message
The old and new channels for the assignment procedure will be
released when the T3107 timer expires. Corresponding MS
connection will be cleared, and a BSSAP ASSIGNMENT FAILURE
message will be sent to MSC. CLEAR REQUEST message will be
sent to MSC for intra-cell handover procedure.
Value range: 35 ~ 100
See Table 41 for value range of T3107.

T ABLE 41 V ALUE RANGE OF T3107

Value Time Represented


35 3.5 s
36 3.6 s
37 3.7 s

100 10 s
Other values Reserved

T3107 < T10 when setting this timer


Default value: 60
41. T3109: channel release period
Description: T3109 timer supervises channel release process
Timer start conditions: the T3109 timer is started when BSC sends
the RIL3_RR CHANNEL REALEASE message to MS
The T3109 timer expires when BSC receives the RELEASE
INDICATION message from BTS (when BTS receives DISC frame
from MS)
BSC will send the RF CHANNEL RELEASE message to BTS when
the T3109 timer expires
Value range: 80 ~ 150
See Table 42 for value range of T3109.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 43


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 42 V ALUE RANGE OF T3109

Value Time Represented


80 8s
81 8.1 s
82 8.2 s


150 15 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 120


42. T3111: channel deactivation delay
Description: Set a protection timer T3111 after UM interface wireless
link layer is released, to ensure disconnection of the wireless link layer.
Release the wireless channel and deactivate it after the T3111 timer
overflows.
Timer start conditions: the T3111 timer starts when BSC receives
the RELEASE INDICATION message.
RF CHANNEL RELEASE message is sent to BTS when the T3111
timer expires
Value range: 1 ~ 1200
See Table 43 for value range of T3111.

T ABLE 43 V ALUE RANGE OF T3111

Value Time Represented


1 0.1
2 0.2

5 0.5 s
Other values Reserved

Default value: 1
43. Tbsic: BSIC decode period
Description: The parameter Tbsic defines a period, that is, calculated
from call establishment or handover complete (inter-cell or intra-cell),
C/I evaluation is considered irresponsible during this period, thus, it is
not allowed to handover to a special TRX. During this period, MS can
decode BSICs that interferes with (neighboring) cells before handover
policy takes place.
Value range: 5 ~ 640
See Table 44 for value rang of Tbsic.

44 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

T ABLE 44 V ALUE RANGE OF TBSIC

Value Time Length


5 0.5 s
10 1.0 s


640 64.0 s

Default value: 50
44. AisT1 (100 ms)
Description: AppAssignReq-AppAssignCom the Assigning status
protection timer. It is in the Assigning status before sending the
App_Ass_Req message and receiving the App_Ass_Commessage.
Value range: 1 ~ 600
Default value: 100
45. AisT4 (100 ms)
Description: AppRadioApp-AppRadioAvail (external hand in),
RadioApplying status protection timer. It is in the RadioApplying
status after receiving the message A_Ho_Req and before receiving
the APP_RADIO_AVAIL message.
Value range: 1 ~ 600
Default value: 100
46. AisT12 (100 ms)
Description: The Serving status protection timer. It is in Serving
status after CR is sent and CC is received and before any further
message is received; or after the App Ass Com message is received
and before the call is cleared; or after the App Ho Com message is
received at the handover from external and before the call is cleared.
Value range: 50 ~ 1200
Default value: 200
47. AisT8 (100 ms)
Description: AisT8 is the OutGoHoing status protection time that has
received the HoCmd (sending the AppHOCmd to Rms)-
ClearCmd. It is in the OutGoHoing status after receiving the
A_Ho_Cmd to start the external handover and before the
A_Clear_Cmd is received once the handover is successful.
Value range: 1 ~ 600
Default value: 80
48. RMST3121 (100 ms)
Description: Protection time after sending inter-system to utran
handover command (UM) to UE (on Pn)
Value range: 1 ~ 650
Default value: 100

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 45


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

49. T3 (100 ms)


Description: Protection time after number 7 breaks off suddenly
Value range: 10 ~ 200
Default value: 100
50. BCRT (100 ms)
Description: Regular timer for system message broadcast
Value range: 6000 ~ 2864000
Default value: 18000
51. BCPT (100 ms)
Description: Protection timer waiting for FUC response to system
message broadcast
Value range: 30 ~ 100
Default value: 50

GPRS Maximum Retrying Times


Parameters
1. BVCBlkMax
Description: BSSGP layer parameters - if PTP BVC must be blocked due
to OAM intervention or equipment faults (disable blocking/unblocking
signaling BVC), BSS will first set BVC status as Blocked and discard
uplink service data. To notify SGSN to stop sending downlink data, BSS
will initiate BVC blocking procedure. It will repeat BVC blocking
procedure after sending BVC block message to SGSN and if it fails to
receive BVC BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in
BSSGPT1. BVC blocking can be repeated for a maximum of N times.
BSC will stop BVC blocking and notify OMS of such if for N times
there is no answer. N depends on maximum reattempts of BVC BLOCK.
Value range: 3 ~ 10
Default value: 3
2. BVCUBlkMax
Description: BSSGP layer parameters - if the PTP BVC must be
unblocked due to the OAM intervention or recovery of the equipment
fault (disable blocking/unblocking the signaling BVC), BSS will first set
the BVC status as Unblocked. To notify SGSN to start sending the
downlink data, BSS will also initiate the BVC unblocking procedure. It
will repeat the BVC unblocking procedure after sending the BVC
UNBLOCK message to SGSN and if it fails to receive the BVC
UNBLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in BSSGPT1. BVC
unblocking can be repeated for a maximum of N times. BSC will stop
BVC unblocking and notify OMS of such if for N times there is no
answer. N depends on maximum reattempts of BVC UNBLOCK.
Value range: 3 ~ 10
Default value: 3

46 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

3. BVCResetMax
Description: BSSGP layer parameters - to keep initial status consistent
between two BVC sides, Reset BVC process must be initiated in
following cases: 1) system faults that affects BVC function in BSS or
SGSN (such as restart upon power-on); 2) lower layer network service
entity failure (such as frame relay fault); 3) lower layer network
service entity capability update (for example, frame relay capability
changed from 0kbps to greater than 0kbps); 4) changing relationships
between BVC and cell. For faults that affect NSE, Signaling BVC reset
procedure is initiated; For faults that affect a single BVC, PTP BVC
reset procedure is initiated. All PTP BVC reset under that NSE must
be initiated after a signaling BVC reset is initiated. It will repeat BVC
reset procedure after sending BVC RESET message to SGSN and if it
fails to receive BVC RESET ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in
BSSGPT2. BVC RESET can be repeated for a maximum of N times.
BSC will stop BVC RESET and notify OMS of such if for N times there
is no answer. N depends on maximum reattempts of BVC Reset.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 3
4. NSBlkMax
Description: NS link layer parameters - maximum repetitions during
BSC blocking. It will repeat blocking process when BSC sends the NS
BLOCK message to SGSN and if NS BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message
sent by the SGNS has not been received in a specified NS_T1 time.
NS BLOCK message can be repeated for a maximum of N times. BSC
will stop BLOCK procedure and notify OMS of such if for N times there
is still no answer. N depends on maximum reattempts of NS BLOCK.
Value range: 0 ~ 10
Default value: 3
5. NSUnBlkMax
Description: NS link layer parameters - maximum repetitions during
BSC unblocking. It will repeat UNBLOCK procedure after BSC sends the
NS UNBLOCK message to SGSN and if it fails to receive the NS
BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in the time specified by
the timer NS_T1. The NS UNBLOCK message can be repeated for a
maximum of N times. BSC will stop the UNBLOCK procedure and notify
OMS of such if for N times there is still no answer. N depends on
maximum reattempts of NS UNBLOCK.
Value range: 010
Default value: 3
6. NSAliveMax
Description: Maximum repetitions of BSC Alive procedure. It will repeat
BSC Alive procedure after BSC sends NS Alive message to SGSN and
if it fails to receive NS Alive ACKNOWLEDGE message from SGSN in
the time specified by timer NS_T4. NS Alive message can be
repeated for a maximum of N times. BSC will stop BSC Alive procedure
and notify OMS of such if for N times there is still no answer. N
depends on maximum reattempts of NS Alive.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 47


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: 0 ~ 20
Default value: 10
7. SuspendMax
Description: BSSGP layer parameters - MS will first send a SUSPEND
message to BSS over SDCCH when Class B GPRS MS is about to
initiate a voice service. BSS initiates Suspend procedure to SGSN to
notify SGSN to stop sending PS paging and downlink packet data
after BSS receives the message. It will repeat Suspend procedure
after sending SUSPEND message to SGSN and if it fails to receive
SUSPEND ACK/NACK message from SGSN in BSSGPT3. It will repeat
Suspend procedure for a maximum of N times. BSC will stop
Suspend and notify OMS of such if for N times there is no answer. N
depends on maximum Suspend reattempts.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 3
8. ResumeMax
Description: BSSGP layer parameters - when GPRS-attached MS
leaves a special mode, BSS can adopt one of the following strategies:
1) Notify MS of carrying out route area upgrade and 2) notify SGSN
of recovering the GPRS service. In case of Routing Area Update, MS
and SGSN will directly negotiate GMM status. With the Resume
method (usually for MS in the packet transmission status), BSS will
initiate the RESUME process to SGSN to notify SGSN to start the
normal packet downlink transmission action. It will repeat Resume
procedure after sending the RESUME message to SGSN and if it fails
to receive the RESUME ACK/NACK message from SGSN in BSSGPT4.
It will repeat Resume procedure for a maximum of N times. BSC will
stop the Resume procedure and notify OMS of such if for N times
there is no answer. N depends on maximum Resume reattempts.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 3
9. UpdateMax
Description: BSSGP layer parameters - when MS is establishing the
uplink/downlink TBF, to assign the appropriate packet channel to the
MSs that have different access capabilities, BSS needs to know the
radio access capability of that MS. BSS can obtain that information
from SGSN by the Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure if it
does not have that information yet. It will repeat the procedure after
sending the RADIO ACCESS CAPABILITIES UPDATE message to
SGSN and if it fails to receive the RADIO ACCESS CAPABILITIES
UPDATE ACK/NACK message from SGSN in BSSGPT5. The Radio
Access Capabilities Update procedure can be repeated for a maximum
of N times. For N times if there is still no answer, then BSC will stop
the Radio Access Capabilities Update procedure and notify OMS of
such. N depends on maxmium Update reattempts.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 3

48 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

GPRS Timer Parameters


1. BSSGP T1 BVC block/unblock reattempt time
Description: Timer that monitors BSSGP block/unblock procedure.
Parameter used by global process in central module MP. BSS initiates
BVC block/unblock procedure if a point-to-point BVC block/unblock is
required due to OAM intervention or device faults and repeats the
procedure if SGSN does not return BVC BLOCK/UNBLOCK ACK/NACK
message. Interval between them is BssgpT1.
Value range: 10 ~ 300 (100ms)
Default value: 30
2. BSSGPT2 BVC Reset reattempt time
Description: Timer that monitors reset procedure of BSSGP. Parameter
used by global process in central module MP. BSS initiates BVC
RESET process if BVC (including PTP BVC and signaling BVC) must be
reset and repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return BVC RESET
ACK/NACK message. Interval between them is BssgpT2.
Value range: 10 ~ 1200 (100ms)
Default value: 30
3. BSSGPT3 Suspend reattempt time
Description: Timer that monitors Suspend procedure of BSSGP.
Parameter used by service process in peripheral module MP. Class B
MS notifies network to Suspend packet service when it is ready to
perform a voice service. BSS initiates Suspend SGSN procedure after
receiving SUSPEND message from MS and repeats the procedure if
SGSN does not return SUSPEND ACK/NACK message. Interval
between them is BssgpT3.
Value range: 1 ~ 100 (100ms)
Default value: 30
4. BSSGPT4 Resume reattempt time
Description: Timer that monitors Resume procedure of BSSGP.
Parameter used by service process in peripheral module MP. BSS
initiates Resume procedure to SGSN when GPRS-attached MS is not
in dedicated mode and BSS uses Notify SGSN to resume GPRS
service policy. BSS repeats the procedure if SGSN does not return
RESUME ACK/NACK message. Interval between them is BssgpT4.
Value range: 1 ~ 100 (100ms)
Default value: 30
5. BSSGPT5 Radio Access Capabilities Update reattempt time
Description: Timer that monitors RA_CAPABILITY procedure of
BSSGP. Parameter used by service process in peripheral module MP. It
will repeat Radio Access Capability Update procedure after BSS
initiates RA_CAPABILITY procedure to SGSN and if SGSN does not
return the RA_CAPABILITY UPDATE ACK/NACK message. The interval
between them is BssgpT5.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 49


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: 10 ~ 300 (100ms)


Default value: 30
6. NS T1
Description: Timer that monitors the block/unblock procedure at the
NS layer
Value range: 1 ~ 120 s
Default value: 60
7. NS T2
Description: Timer that monitors the reset procedure at the NS layer
Value range: 1 ~ 120 s
Default value: 60
8. NS T3
Description: The test period of NS-VC
Value range: 1 ~ 60 s
Default value: 30
9. NS T4
Description: Timer that monitors the alive procedure of the NSVC
Value range: 3 s
Default value: 3
10. NS T5 (temporarily not used)
Description: Maximum attempt period of Reset
Value range: 3 min
Default value: 180 s.
11. T3169
Description: BRPs timer at RLC/MAC layer. During the packet uplink
transmission, if the timer N3101 or N3103 expires, BSS will start the
timer T3169. TFI and USF resources are released for use by the
network when T3169 expires.
Timer start conditions: the T3169 timer starts when the counter
N3101 = N3101_MAX or the counter N3103 = N3103_MAX
Stop conditions of the timer: none
Timeout action: Release USF and TFI resources
Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms)
Default value: 500 (5 s)
12. T3191
Description: BRPs timer at RLC/MAC layer. During the packet downlink
transmission, if the BSN of the RLC data block to be transmitted is at
its maximum load (that is, the final downlink data block), the network
will send RLC data block whose Final Block Identifier (FBI) field is 1
and which includes effective RRBP field to initialize the release of the

50 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

downlink TBF. At this time the network starts the T3191 timer. For RLC
data block in which each received FBI is 1 and containing effective
RRBP domain, MS must send the Package Downlink
Confirmation/Non-confirmation message whose FAI domain is 1
through the uplink block specified by the RRBP domain. T3191 is
terminated and required RLC data block is re-transmitted if the
network receives the PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message before
the T3191 timer expires and is required to re-transmit it. T3191 timer
is terminated and enabled T3193 timer if re-transmission is not
necessary. The network releases TBF when T3193 timer expires. The
network also releases TBF when T3191 expires; 2) In unacknowledged
mode, MS must send the PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE
message in the uplink block specified by the RRBP field. T3191 is
terminated and T3193 enabled if the network receives the PACKET
CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message before T3191 expires. The
network also releases TBF when T3191 expires.
Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms)
Default value: 500 (5 s)
13. T3193
Description: BRPs timer at the RLC/MAC layer is used for protection at
the release of TBF during the packet downlink transmission. For
details, see description of the T3191 timer.
Timer start conditions: the timer T3193 is started when the
PACKET DOWNLINK ACK/NACK message or the PACKET
CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message is received
Timer stop conditions: when the network has established a new
downlink TBF
Timeout action: Release TFI resources
Value range: 00xFFFF (10ms)
Default value: 51
Value of this parameter needs to be greater than T3192 timer to
ensure uniqueness of TFI of MS at one moment
14. T3195
Description: BRPs timer at the RLC/MAC layer. Protection time of TBF
when the radio link failure or the cell change leads to MS failure to
respond. During the packet downlink transmission, if the timer N3105
expires, BSS will start the T3195 timer. The TFI resource is available
again for use by the network when T3195 timer expires.
Timer start conditions: the timer T3195 starts when the counter
N3105 = N3105_MAX
Stop conditions of the timer: none
Timeout action: Release TFI resources
Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF (10ms)
Default value: 500 (5 s).
15. ccmT1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 51


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Description: Protection timer for change of the FUC channel type


Value range: 2 ~ 10 s
Default value: 10 s.
16. ccmT2
Description: Protection timer for T-network connection
Value range: 2 ~ 10 s
Default value: 10 s.
17. ccmT3
Description: Protection timer for LSP movement
Value range: 2 ~ 10 s
Default value: 10 s.

Other GPRS Property Parameters


1. CELL Threshold of the Bssgp Flow Control (CelFcThs)
Description: This parameter is the trigger threshold for BVC flow
control. The BVC flow control is performed on the Gb interface
between SGSN and BSS and in the downlink only. In practice, BSS
provides the control parameter and SGSN executes it to avoid the
situation of the LLC data being discarded due to timeout caused by the
busy packet channel in BVC (excess LLS frames buffered) or that the
new downlink LLC data is discarded due to limited memory resources
(LLC frame buffer overflow). The BSSGP process on the BSS side
periodically (long or short) counts the current leakage ratio of BVC.
BVC flow control procedure is initiated unconditionally. SGSN
confirmation is also necessary if the long count timer overflows. BVC
flow control is initiated and it also needs the SGSN confirmation if the
short count timer overflows and the difference between the two
consecutive leakage ratios is more than CellFcThs.
Value range: 1 ~ 100 (%)
Default value: 80
2. MS Threshold of the Bssgp Flow Control (MsFcThs)
Description: This parameter is the trigger threshold for MS flow
control. MS flow control is performed on the Gb interface between
SGSN and BSS and in the downlink only. In practice, BSS provides the
control parameter and SGSN executes it to avoid the situation of the
LLC data from being discarded due to timeout caused by the busy
packet channel in MS (excessive LLS frames buffered) and that the
new downlink LLC data is discarded due to limited memory resources
(LLC frame buffer overflow). The BSSGP process at the BSS side
periodically (long or short) measures the current leakage ratio of MS.
MS Flow Control process is initiated unconditionally if the long
measurement timer overflows. SGSN must acknowledge it if the
difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more than
MsFcThs. MS Flow Control process is initiated and it also needs
acknowledgement of SGSN if the short measurement timer overflows

52 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

and the difference between the two consecutive leakage ratios is more
than MsFcThs.
Value range: 1 ~ 100 (%)
Default value: 80
3. CELL Trigger Period of the Bssgp Flow Control (CelFcPer)
Description: This parameter is the BVC leakage ratio measurement
period in the BVC Flow Control process, that is, BVC long
measurement period. To provide reference to the BVC flow control at
the SGSN side, the BSSGP process at the BSS side periodically
measures the current BVC leakage ratio. BVC flow control procedure
is initiated unconditionally when the long measurement timer overflows.
It needs to be confirmed by SGSN if the difference of the leakage
ratios between the two times exceeds CellFcThs. BVC flow control
procedure is also initiated and it also needs to be confirmed by SGSN if
the short measurement timer overflows, and the difference of the
leakage ratio between the two times exceeds CellFcThs. In the OMCR
(V2) system, BVC short measurement period = BVC long measurement
period / 3.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (10ms)
Default value: 3000
4. MS Trigger Period of the Bssgp Flow Control (MsFcPer)
Description: This parameter is MS leakage ratio measurement period in
the MS Flow Control process, that is, MS long measurement period.
For reference of flow control at the SGSN side, the BSSGP process at
the BSS side periodically measures the current leakage ratio of each
MS. MS Flow Control process is initialized unconditionally when the
long measurement timer overflows. SGSN must acknowledge it if the
difference between the two leakage ratios exceeds MsFcThs. MS Flow
Control process is initialized and it also needs acknowledgement from
the SGSN when the short measurement timer overflows, and the
difference between the two leakage ratios exceeds MsFcThs. In the
OMCR (V2) system, MS short measurement period = MS long
measurement period/3.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (10ms)
Default value: 3000
5. N3101: Maximum allowed number of continuous losses of uplink data
blocks
Description: This is the parameter used at RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
During packet uplink transmission, BSS will specify USF (corresponding
to one uplink TBF) for each uplink block. For a USF, if the network
receives correct data from a specified uplink block, timer N3101 is
cleared for that TBF; if the number of losses in that specified uplink
block exceeds N3101, then timer T3169 is started. TFI and USF
resources are available for use by the network when T3169 expires.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 10
6. N3103: Number of Packet Uplink ACK/NACK reattempts

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 53


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Description: This is the parameter used at RLC/MAC layer of BRP.


Network sends a PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message and set Final
Acknowledgement Identifier (FAI) as 1 during packet uplink
transmission, if it detects that all RLC data blocks have been received
at end of uplink TBF (CV = 0, and V(Q) = V(R). The header of
RLC/MAC control block contains a valid RRBP domain. Counter N3103
is cleared. MS sends PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in
block specified by RRBP and release TBF if it receives PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK message whose FAI is 1 from network side. The value of
the counter N3103 is incremented and the PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK message is retransmitted if the network fails to receive
PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGE message in the radio block
specified by the RRBP field. The network will start T3169 timer if the
value of N3103 exceeds the limiting N3103max. TFI and USF resources
are available again for use by the network when T3169 timer expires.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 10
7. N3105: Allowed maximum number of continuous losses of the uplink
RLC/MAC CONTROL message
Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
During the packet downlink transmission, BSS will set RRBP field in the
downlink RLC data block at a certain interval to notify MS to send the
RLC/MAC CONTROL message in the corresponding uplink block. For a
TBF, if the number of consecutive losses of the RLC/MAC CONTROL
message in the specified uplink block exceeds N3105max, then the
timer T3195 is started. TFI resource is available for use by the network
when the T3195 timer expires.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 10
8. MS CSMode
Description: This parameter refers to the channel coding mode
Value range: See Table 45 for value range of MS Csmode.

T ABLE 45 V ALUE RANGE OF M S CSM ODE

Value Coding Mode


0 CS-2 by default, but the coding mode may vary dynamically between CS-2 and
CS-1.
1 CS-1
2 CS-2
3 CS-3
4 CS-4

Default value: 1
9. Cn Level: for determining increase of coding mode level

54 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.


Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data
block may use the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes, whose data rates are
9.05 kbps, 13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low
level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data
throughput. You can choose different coding modes for each timeslot
or even each TBF. The network will select the coding mode dynamically
according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality
at the transmission of the GRPR data, to reach maxmium radio
throughput. Good radio transmission quality means that the probability
of the retransmission of the error radio blocks is small. At this time the
coding mode that carries large data volume (that is, high level coding
mode) can be used. The coding mode for TBF (uplink and downlink) in
the channel coding mode CSn (1=n=3) will be increased by one level,
if the number of data blocks transmitted consecutively and correctly
exceeds the predefined parameter Cn n-1.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 10
10. Nn Level: for determining decrease of coding mode level
Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data
block may use the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes, whose data rates are
9.05 kbps, 13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low
level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data
throughput. It is all right to choose different coding modes for each
timeslot or even each TBF. The network will select the coding mode
dynamically according to the data rate requirement and radio
transmission quality at the transmission of the GRPR data, to reach
maxmium radio throughput. The coding mode with stronger anti-
interference capability (that is, low level coding mode) must be used
when the radio transmission quality is poor. The coding level is
decreased by one if Nn n-2 data blocks are transmitted, the number of
consecutive losses of the data blocks in the coding mode CSn (2n4)
for the TBF (downlink and uplink) is Xn n-2%.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 20
11. Xn Level: threshold for determining the decrease in the level of the
coding mode
Description: This is the parameter used at the RLC/MAC layer of BRP.
Unlike the unified coding mode of the circuit channel, the GPRS data
block may use the CS-1 to CS-4 coding modes, whose data rates are
9.05 kbps, 13.4 kbps, 15.6 kbps, and 21.4 kbps, respectively. The low
level coding mode has higher error correction capability and lower data
throughput. You can choose different coding modes for each timeslot
or even each TBF. The network will select the coding mode dynamically
according to the data rate requirement and radio transmission quality
at the transmission of the GRPR data, to reach maxmium radio
throughput. The coding mode with stronger anti-interference capability
(that is, low level coding mode) must be used when the radio
transmission quality is poor. the coding level is decreased by one if Nn
n-2 data blocks are transmitted, the number of consecutive losses of

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 55


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

the data blocks in the coding mode are CSn (2n4) for the TBF
(downlink and uplink) is Xn n-2 %.
Value range: 1 ~ 100 (%)
Default value: 80
12. NSVC Delay (Delay)
Description: This is a NS link layer parameter. NSVC is an end-to-end
concept. The NSVC delay is the basis for flow control in frame relay. It
is configured in the background subject to the actual circumstances.
Value range: 1 ~ 20ms
Default value: 10ms
13. Channel-Fail Report Period (FailRptPrd) (52 Frames)
This parameter is the report period for the channel failure ratio (52
multiframes)
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 10
14. Ideal Channel Bearer Rate (OverLoadTh)
Description: This parameter is used by the database in the peripheral
module MP. Two steps of GPRS uplink and downlink PS wireless
resource assignment: The first step is to assign a time slot, that is,
PDCH channel assignment implemented by the database on MP. The
second step is to assign specific RLC/MAC data block resources on each
channel accomplished by a packet control module. In MP, to prevent
one PS channel from being used infinitely, the system sets a
Maximum bearing rate threshold for the packet channel. It is set in
the Channel busy state if the bearer rate of a packet channel has
exceeded the threshold value. The subsequent packet access will not
take that channel into account, to avoid congestion on the timeslot
level.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (100bps)
Default value: 65535
15. Original Access Rate (DefRate)
Description: This parameter is used by the database in peripheral
module MP. At the initial access of MS (especially the first step, that is,
channel request, of the two-step access process), it may not have the
resource request information. The network side will allocate the PS
channel at the default rate. Also, during the TBF establishment, the
resource rate is less than DefRate, the database will not take the extra
timeslot capability of MS into account instead allocate a single PS
channel to it for utilizing the channel resources effectively.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (100bps)
Default value: 10
16. Whether current Gb interface adopts satellite transmission
(IsSatelliatedGB)
Value range: True: Current Gb interface adopts satellite transmission;
False: Current Gb interface doesn't adopt satellite transmission

56 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

Default value: False


17. Whether to adopt extended RLC sending slippery window
(IsWindowExtend)
Value range: True: Adopting extended RLC sending slipping window;
False: Not adopting extended RLC sending slipping window
Default value: False

Dynamic HR Property Parameters


1. Threshold value of single TRX cell to hand over from full rate to half
rate (SINTRXFRTOHRTHS)
Description: Threshold value of single TRX cell to hand over from full
rate to half rate = TCH channels occupied in cell/all available TCH
channels in the cell (including IDLE and BUSY). TCH channels contain
TCH/F and TCH/H. It is necessary to perform the handover of TCH/F
TCH/H, for the traffic is busy in the cell that upper limit corresponds to.
Cells fall into two types during the handover from full rate to half rate:
i. Configure only one TRX in the cell
ii. Configure two or more TRXs in the cell
TCH channels are less if only one TRX is configured in the cell and it is
necessary to configure BCCH and SDCCH channels. Therefore, there
are 6 TCH channels in a single TRX cell. There must be difference
between the threshold of single TRX cell and of multiple TRXs, to
reflect actual situation better.
Threshold falls into RMM module threshold and cell threshold,
according to convenience of controlling the cell and difference of the
cell. RMM module threshold is default. It is valid to all cells configured
with dynamic handover channel under this module. Set threshold for
this cell in cell Level 1 setting if it needs special controlling threshold.
Threshold RMM module settings is invalid to this cell in this case.
Value range: 60 ~ 85 (unit%)
Default value: 65
2. Threshold value of multiple TRX cells to hand over from full rate to half
rate (MULTRXFRTOHRTHS)
Description: Same as Threshold value of single TRX cell to hand over
from full rate to half rate (SINTRXFRTOHRTHS)
Value range: 60 ~ 85 (unit%)
Default value: 75
3. Threshold value to hand over from full rate to half rate (HRTOFRTHS)
Description: Threshold value to hand over from full rate to half rate =
TCH channels occupied in the cell/all available TCH channels in the cell
(including IDLE and BUSY). Note: TCH channels include TCH/F and
TCH/H. It is necessary to perform handover of TCH/H TCH/F, for the
traffic is rather idle in the cell that lower limit corresponds to.
Threshold falls into RMM module threshold and cell threshold,
according to convenience of controlling the cell and difference of the

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 57


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

cell. RMM module threshold is default. It is valid to all cells configured


with dynamic handover channel under this module. Set threshold for
this cell in cell Level 1 setting if it needs special controlling threshold.
Threshold RMM module settings is invalid to this cell in this case.
Value range: 30 ~ 60 (unit%)
Default value: 50
4. Protection time to hand over from full rate to half rate
(FRTOHRKEEPTIME)
Description: Occupation of the channel is random, and it may result in
frequent adjustment of channels. Set timer protection after one
handover to avoid the frequency. It does not perform the handover
during the protection time even if it meets the requirements of
handover. Differ handover of TCH/F TCH/H and TCH/H TCH/F.
Dynamic HR is to guarantee the cell to provide as many voice channels
as possible during the high-traffic, so handover protection time of
TCH/F TCH/H is shorter and that of TCH/H TCH/F is longer.
Default value:
Protection time to hand over TCH/F to TCH/H: 5 mins
Protection time to hand over TCH/H to TCH/F: 30 mins
Note: This parameter falls into RMM module class and cell class. It can
be adjusted flexibly to guarantee the convenience of setting.
Value range: 3 ~ 30 (min)
Default value: 5
5. Protection time to hand over from half rate to full rate
(HRTOFRKEEPTIME)
Description: Same as Protection time to hand over from full rate to half
rate (FRTOHRKEEPTIME)
Value range: 15 ~ 60 (min)
Default value: 30

BVC Flow Control Property Parameters


1. Whether to support BVC flow control (BVCFlowCtrl)
Description: BVC flow control occurs on Gb interface between SGSN
and BSS, and only on downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and
SGSN executes, to avoid one BVC on BSS to abandon some LLC data
because of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too
many LLC frame caches) and to avoid new downlink LLC data because
of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches). BSSGP
process at BSS side counts current leaking rate of BVC periodically
(including short statistics and long statistics). BVCFlowCtrl originates
unconditionally if long statistics timer overflows and SGSN
acknowledgement is necessary if discrepant range of adjacent leaking
rates is over CellFcThs. BVCFlowCtrl originates and SGSN
confirmation is necessary if short statistics timer overflows and
discrepant range of adjacent leaking rates is over CellFcThs.

58 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

Value range: True: Enabling BSC to support BVC flow control; False:
Disabling BSC to support BVC flow control
Default value: True
2. Whether to support MS flow control (MsFlowCtrl)
Description: MS flow control occurs on Gb interface between SGSN and
BSS, and only on downlinks. BSS provides control parameters and
SGSN executes, to avoid one MS on BSS to abandon some LLC data
because of the overtime caused by grouping channel is too busy (too
many LLC frame caches) and to avoid new downlink LLC data because
of limit of memory resource (overflow of LLC frame caches). BSSGP
process at BSS side counts current leaking rate of MS periodically
(including short statistics and long statistics). MsFlowCtrl originates
unconditionally if long statistics timer overflows and SGSN
acknowledgement is necessary if discrepant range of adjacent leaking
rates is over MsFcThs. MsFlowCtrl originates and SGSN confirmation
is necessary if short statistics timer overflows and discrepant range of
adjacent leaking rates is over MsFcThs.
Value range: True: enabling MS to support BVC flow control; False:
Disabling MS to support BVC flow control
Default value: False
3. Flow control mode (FlowCtrlMode):
Description: See protocol 08.18 for BVC flow control. BSC has different
flow control modes report flow control parameters to SGSN, to realize
SGSN flow control of different providers. Description:
Mode 1: Report flow control parameters according to actual traffic on
radio interface counted by BSC
Mode 2: Report flow control parameters according to max traffic that
the cell can provide
Mode 3: Reserved
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 1
4. Flow control 1 parameters (FlowCtlMode1Para)
Description: BSC reports flow control parameters according to actual
traffic on radio interface when adopting mode 1. Actual counted value
is smaller because of radio interface re-transmission and TBF failure,
so BSC times actual traffic with a times depending on this parameter
when reporting flow control parameters.
Value range: 1 ~ 100
Default value: 1
5. Flow control mode 2 parameters (FlowCtlMode1Para)
Description: BSC reports flow control parameters according to max
traffic that the cell can provide when adopting mode 2. Max value
depends on channels configured. Counting formula: channels * max
traffic that every channel can provide. This parameter is max traffic
that every channel can provide, with the unit of 100 bps.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 59


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: 10 ~ 1000


Default value: 214
6. BVC flow control R min value (BVCFlowCtrlRMin)
Description: Min value of leaking rate R in reported BVC flow control
parameters under all flow control modes, that is, reported parameter R
must be equal or over set value, in the unit of 100 bps.
Value range: 10 ~ 300
Default value: 80
7. MS flow control min value (MSFlowCtrlRMin)
Description: Min value of leaking rate R in reported MS flow control
parameters under all flow control modes, that is, reported parameter R
must be equal or over set value, in the unit of 100 bps.
Value range: 10 ~ 300
Default value: 80

BS Parameters
1. Site identification (SiteID): ID of the SITE in BSC, and one SITE
manages 3 cells at most
2. CS user alias (Alias): Name of the SITE, in Chinese or letter
3. Resource location information (LocName): Geographic description of
wgere BS locates
4. Module number (ModuleNo): Module number of the Pn (number of
radio module) that the cell correspods to
5. Distinguish name of physical SITE (Distinguish Name): Distinguish
Name (DN) of physical SITE that local BSS relates to: BssId-SiteId
6. Operation and maintenance channel of the site (ROAMLAPD): Logical
Lapdlink that this site corresponds to

External Cell Parameters


1. Cell frequency band (FreqBand)
Description: The system supports four frequency bands, as shown in
Table 46.

60 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

T ABLE 46 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL F REQUENCY BAND

Value Cell Frequency Band


GSM900: 890915 MHZ (uplink)
900
935960MHZ (downlink)
EGSM900: 880915 MHZ (uplink)
EXT900
925960MHZ (downlink)
GSM1800: 17101785 MHZ (uplink)
DCS1800
18051880 MHZ (downlink)
GSM850M: 824849 MHZ (uplink)
850M
869894 MHZ (downlink)

2. BCCH absolute radio frequency channel number (BARFCN)


Description: ARFCN of BCCH carrier frequency of cells.
Value range: 0 ~ 1023
3. Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Description: MCC consists of three decimal scale numbers, which is to
uniquely identify the home country of the mobile subscriber (or
system).
Value range: 0 ~ 999
Default value: 460 (MCC of China)
4. Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Description: MNC consists of two decimal scale numbers, which
uniquely identifies a specific GSM PLMN network in a country (decided
by MCC).
Value range: 099
Note: Each network has a different MNC if a country has more than
one GSM public land mobile network. MNC is generally allocated by
national telecom administration department, and the one carrier can
have multiple MNC (depending on the service scale offered), but
different carriers cannot share the same MNC. China has two GSM
networks at present, China Mobile and China Unicom with the MNCs
being 00 and 01 respectively.
Default value: 00
5. Location Area Code (LAC)
Description: The coverage of each GSM PLMN is divided into many
location areas to determine the location of the mobile station, and the
location code is to identify different location areas. LAC is one of the
LAI composition parts (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location area
contains multiple cells.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (0 and 65535 are reserved by the system)
6. Cell ID (CI)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 61


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Description: Network carriers must allocate a unique code for each cell
in a location area to uniquely indicate each cell in the GSM PLMN, that
is, cell ID (CI).
Value range: 0 ~ 65535
7. Network Color Code (NCC)
Description: NCC is one of the composition parts of the Base Station ID
Code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC), NCC is to enable mobile stations to
distinguish adjacent and different GSM PLMN cells. Neighboring
operators usually have different NCCs. The parameter related to NCC is
the NccPermitted parameter of the cell. MS is disabled to measure
the cell information of related operators by prohibiting MS to report
relative NCC in the cell. NCC actually occupies three bits. NCC is one of
the network identification parameters.
Value range: 0 ~ 7
Note: Neighboring GSM PLMN usually select different NCCs.
8. BTS Color Code (BCC)
Description: BCC is one of the composition parts of the Base Station ID
Code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). BCC is usually to enable mobile
stations to distinguish adjacent cells with the same BCCH carrier
frequency and belonging to the same GSM PLMN. In addition, the GSM
specifications stipulate that TSC (Training Sequence Code) of the
broadcast control channel of a cell is equal to the cell BCC. BCC
occupies three bits. It is one of the network identification parameters.
Value range: 0 ~ 7
Note: Ensure that neighboring or adjacent cells using same BCCH
carrier frequency must have different BSIC.
9. Support SoLSA MS Access (EXC_ACC)
Description: This parameter is broadcast to MS in the SI4, SI6, and
SI7 messages and in the PSI3 and Psi3bis messages of local and
neighboring cells. The network uses this parameter to prevent MS from
residing in the cell.
Value range; 0: The cell is available to SoLSA mutual exclusive visit; 1:
The cell is unavailable to SoLSA mutual exclusive visit
Default value: 0
10. LSA ID (LSA_ID)
Description: This parameter is broadcasted to MS in the SI4, SI6,
SI7, and PSI3 messages and in the PSI3 and Psi3bis messages
of the neighboring cells. It specifies LSA identifier of the cell.
Note: Determined by the network operator after the planning
11. RAC
GPRS system divides the location area to several routing areas that are
identified by RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC), like the GSM system using
the location area to manage a group of cells. Routing area update
procedure is initiated in case of MS cell reselection in attach state, if
the RAIs of the old and new cells change. MS and SGSN in Standby
state know the routing area information. It pages MS in that routing

62 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

area when the network has packet data or circuit data to transmit. RAI
cannot span more than one SGSN.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Note: Uniformly planned by the network operator
12. MS Min RxLev to Access (RxLevAsMin)
Description: Parameter used on MS side. This parameter is
broadcasted to MS in the PSI3 message of local cell and PSI3 and
PSI3bis messages of adjacent cells. It indicates minimum receiving
level for MS to access the GPRS system. It is prescribed in the GSM
system that receiving level must be larger than a threshold level when
MS needs to access the network, that is: MS Min RxLev to Access
(RxLevAsMin). It is to prevent MS from accessing the system in case of
low receiving signal level (the communication quality cannot guarantee
normal communication process after accessing), and from
unreasonably wasting the radio source of network. In addition, it is
also one of standards for MS to make cell selection and reselection (a
parameter to calculate C31 and C32).
See Table 47 for value range of MS min RxLev to access.

T AB L E 4 7 V AL U E R AN G E O F M S M I N R X L E V T O AC C E S S

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108

61 -50 ~ -49
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: Recommended value is usually approximately to MS receiving


sensitivity, and the cell RxLevAccessMin for some cells with
overloaded traffic may be relevantly increased to decrease C1 and C2
values of the cell and along with the cell effective coverage range.
However, the RxLevAccessMin value cannot be too large. Otherwise,
blind area will be created at the cell boundaries factitiously. The level
value is better not to exceed -90 dbm when the measure is adopted to
balance the traffic. At the preliminary running stage of the network,
this parameter usually can be set as 10 (that is, -101 dbm-100 dbm)
or lower, which is higher than the receiving sensitivity of MS, that is, -
102 dbm. However, the parameter of the cell can be increased by 2
(dB) when the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage is
not a problem. Therefore, default value of this parameter can be set as
12 (that is, -99 dbm-98 dbm).
13. MS Max TxPwr Before Network POC (MsTxMaxCCH)
Description: Parameter used on MS side. This parameter is
broadcasted to MS in the PSI3 message of local cell and PSI3 and

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 63


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Psi3bis messages of the neighboring cells. The transmitting power of


MS is controlled by the network during its communication with BTS.
The network controls MS power by the power command and MS must
use the transmitting power specified by the network as its output
power. It uses the power that is closest to the specified value as its
transmitting power if MS cannot output that power value. The power
before MS receives the network power control information (the power
used in random access) depends on GPRS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH when MS
is receiving PBCCH. This parameter is also a parameter for cell
selection and reselection by MS, involving in calculation of C1 and C2
values.
See Table 48 for value range of MS max TxPwr before network POC.

T ABLE 48 V ALUE RANGE OF M S M AX TXPWR BEFORE NETWORK POC

Output Power of MS (dBm) Output Power of MS (dBm)


Value Value
GSM900 GSM1800
0~2 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
5 33 0 30

1 28


16 11
17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
19 ~ 31 5 15 ~ 28 0

Note: MS near BTS will interfere with the neighboring channels if this
parameter is set to a large value. MS at the cell boundary will have low
access success rate if it is too small. Reduce MS access level when
possible under the precondition that MS at the cell boundary is
guaranteed with certain access success rate. The value of this
parameter is usually set as 5 (corresponding to GSM900MS) and 2
(corresponding to GSM1800MS). Test it in experiment mode in
practical applications, after the parameter is set, that is, make a dial
test at the cell boundary, and test MS access success rate and access
time with different parameter settings to determine whether to
increase or decrease parameter value.
14. Offset (dB) (ReselOff)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcast to MS in the
PSI3 message. In the GPRS system, cell reselection adopts C32 as
the standard. Similar to the C2 standard in GSM, there is a cell
reselection offset parameter ReselOff for calculation of the C32
standard. When the offset represented by this parameter is 0 db, it
does not need to be present in the packet system message.
See Table 49 for value range of offset.

64 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

T ABLE 49 V ALUE RANGE OF OFFSET

ReselOffset Relative Level Value


0 -52 dB
1 -48 dB


31 +48 dB

Default value: 0
15. Temp offset (dB) (TmpOffst)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS in the
PSI3 message. In the GPRS system, the cell reselection adopts C32.
There is a temporary offset TempOffset in the C32 that provides a
negative offset, like C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on
Penalty Time parameter.
See Table 50 for value range of temporary offset.

T ABLE 50 V ALUE RANGE OF TEMPOR ARY OFFSET

Value Related Level Value Represented (dB)


0 0
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50
6 60
7 Infinity

Note: It is better to set it the same as the offset in C2 standard of GSM


system.
16. Penalty Time (10 s) (PnlTime)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to MS in the
PSI3 message. The cell reselection in GPRS system adopts C32.
There is a temporary offset TempOffset in the C32 that provides a
negative offset, like C2 in GSM system. The effective time depends on
Penalty Time parameter.
See Table 51 for value range of penalty time.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 65


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 51 V ALUES OF PENAL TY TIME

Value Time Length Represented


0 10 s
1 20 s


31 320 s

Default value: 0
17. HCS parameters (HCS_EXST)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. They belong to Hierarchical
Cell Structure (HCS) and they are broadcasted to MS in the PSI3
message, indicating whether HCS parameters (PrioClass and
HCS_THR) exist in the cell. HCS parameters of other cells will also be
ignored if local cell does not use HCS parameters, that is, all the cells
using the HCS signal strength threshold of infinity.
Value range: 0: Not use HCS parameters; 1: Use HCS parameters
Default value: 0
18. Level Threshold (HCS_THR)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It belongs to HCS parameter
and it is broadcast to MS in the PSI3 message of local cell and
neighboring cells. It shows HCS signal strength threshold of the cell.
See Table 52 for value range of level threshold.

T ABLE 52 V ALUE RANGE OF LEVEL THRESHOLD

Value Corresponding HCS Power Level Threshold


0 -110 db
1 -108 db

63 -48 db

Default value: 0
19. Priority (PrioCls)
Parameter used at MS side. It belongs to the HCS parameter and it is
broadcasted to MS in the PSI3 message. It shows the HCS priority of
the cell.
Value range: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
20. Cell Reselection Status (CelBrAc2)
Description: This parameter belongs to HCS parameter and it is
broadcasted to MS in the PSI3 message. It indicates the cell
reselection status.

66 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 2 - BS System Radio Parameters

Value range: 0: Cell reselection restricted; 1: Cell reselection


Default value: 0
21. Inside-domain (IsDomainInterECell)
Description: This external cell is called inside-domain external cell
when its resource cell belongs to this OMCR NM domain. This external
cell is called outside-domain external cell when its resource cell doesnt
belong to this OMCR NM domain.
Value range: True: Outside-domain external cell; False: Inside-domain
external cell
Default value: False

3G External Cell Parameters


1. 3G external cell ID (Ec3GId)
Value range: 1 ~ 65535
Default value:0
2. 3G cell alias (Alias)
Description: Alias of 3G cell
3. Frequency point of 3G adjacent cell (FDDArfcn)
Value range: 1 ~ 65535
Default value: 0
4. Mobile Country Code (MCC)
Description: MCC consists of three decimal scale numbers, which
uniquely identify the home country of the mobile subscriber (or system)
Value range: 0 ~ 999
5. Mobile Network Code (MNC)
Description: MNC consists of two decimal scale numbers, which
uniquely identifies a specific GSM PLMN network in a country (decided
by MCC)
Value range: 0 ~ 99
6. Location Area Code (LAC)
Description: The coverage of each GSM PLMN is divided into many
location areas to determine the location of the mobile station, and the
location code is to identify different location areas. LAC is one of the
LAI composition parts (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location area
contains multiple cells.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (0 and 65535 are reserved by the system and
cannot be allocated)
7. Cell ID (C_ID)
Description: ID of sG adjacent cell

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 67


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: 0 ~ 65535


8. Main Scrambling group code of 3G adjacent cell 3G (ScramblingCode)
Value range: 0 ~ 511
Default value: 0
9. Adopt diversity (Diversity)
Description: Whether 3G adjacent cell to adopt diversity
Value range: True: Supports 3G adjacent cell to adopt diversity; False:
Doesn't support 3G adjacent cell to adopt diversity
Default value: False
10. Bandwidth of 3G adjacent cell (BandwithFDD)
Description: The bandwidth of 3G adjacent cell
Value range: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
11. RNC that 3G adjacent cell belongs to (RNC_ID)
Description: Each RNC in UTRAN of PLMN has unique ID, that is,
RNC_ID. It is for UTRAN interface messages corresponding to correct
route.
Value range: 0 ~ 4095
Note: Usually allocated uniformly by PLMN operator.

68 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3

Cell Parameters

In this chapter, you will learn about:


Basic Parameters 1
Basic Parameters 2
Optional Parameters
Cell Selection Parameters
Service Process Additional Parameters
System Parameters
Cell Selection Parameters
Other Parameters
GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters
GPRS NC Survey Parameters
GPRS Cell Selection Parameters
GPRS Other Parameters
GPRS Channel Parameters
GPRS Power Control Parameters
Dynamic HR Parameters

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 69


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Basic Parameters 1
1. Cell No. (BTSID)
Description: The logic BTS number inside a SITE. Here, one BTS is a
cell, or a sector frequently mentioned in the network planning.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
2. Cell type (CellType)
Description: The type of the cell
See Table 53 for value range of cell type.

T ABLE 53 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL TYPE

Value Cell Type


0 Umbrella cellular
1 macro-cell
2 micro-cell
3 Micro-micro-cell
4 Extended cell (TA>63)

Default value: 1
3. Location Area Code (LAC)
Description: The coverage of each GSM PLMN can fall into location
areas to determine the location of the mobile station, and the location
code is to identify different location areas. LAC is one of the LAI
composition parts (LAI = MCC + MNC + LAC). One location area
contains multiple cells.
Value range: 0 ~ 65535 (0 and 65535 are reserved by the system)
4. Cell Identity (CI)
Description: Network carriers allocate a unique code for each cell in a
location area to uniquely indicate each cell in the GSM PLMN, that is,
cell ID (CI).
Value range: 0 ~ 65535
5. Network Color Code (NCC)
Description: NCC is one of the composition parts of Base Station ID
Code (BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). NCC is to enable mobile stations to
distinguish adjacent and different GSM PLMN cells. Neighboring
operators usually have different NCCs. The parameter related to NCC is
the NccPermitted parameter of the cell. MS is disabled to measure
the cell information of related operators by prohibiting MS to report
relative NCC in the cell. Actually, NCC occupies three bits. NCC is one
of the network identification parameters.

70 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Value range: 0 ~ 7
Normally, neighboring GSM PLMN should select different NCCs.
6. Bts Color Code (BCC)
Description: BCC is one of composition parts of Base Station ID Code
(BSIC) (BSIC = NCC + BCC). BCC is usually to enable mobile stations
to distinguish adjacent cells with the same BCCH carrier frequency and
belonging to the same GSM PLMN. In addition, GSM specifications
stipulate that Training Sequence Code (TSC) of broadcast control
channel of a cell must be equal to cell BCC. BCC occupies three bits. It
is one of network identification parameters.
Value range: 0 ~ 7
Ensure that neighboring or adjacent cells using same BCCH carrier
frequency must have different BSIC.
7. Cell frequency band (FreqBand)
Description: the system supports four frequency bands.
See Table 54 for value range of cell frequency band.

T ABLE 54 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL F REQUENCY BAND

Value Cell Frequency Band


GSM900: 890915 MHZ (uplink)
900
935960MHZ (downlink)
EGSM900: 880915 MHZ (uplink)
EXT900
925960MHZ (downlink)
GSM1800: 17101785 MHZ (uplink)
DCS1800
18051880 MHZ (downlink)
GSM850M: 824849 MHZ (uplink)
850M
869894 MHZ (downlink)

8. Reselect Hysteresis Power Level (CRH)


Description: MS should initialize a location updating process after
reselecting the cell when MS reselects the cell and if original cell and
destination cell belong to different areas. C2 values of two cells
measured at adjacent cell boundary will normally have relatively great
fluctuation due to the fading characteristic of a radio channel, and
result in MS to frequently reselect cells. Time frame is extremely short
in terms of location updating, although the interval for reselecting two
cells by MS will not be less than 15 s. It not only dramatically increases
the signaling flow of networks, while the radio resources can not be
fully utilized, but also decreases the call completion rate of the system
due to paging unable to be responded to during MS location update.
One parameter called Cell Reselecting Delay Lag (CRH) is set in the
GSM specification to reduce the impact of this issue. It requires the
signal level of adjacent cell (location cell and local cell are different) to
be greater than local cell signal level and its value difference must be
greater than the value specified by CRH. MS will start the cell

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 71


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

reselecting in this case. This parameter is broadcasted to MS in the cell


via the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4, which is
one of the cell selection parameters.
Value range: 0 ~ 7. See Table 55 for value range of reselect Hysteresis
power level.

T ABLE 55 V ALUE RANGE OF RESELECT HYSTERESIS POWER L EVEL

Value Specified Hysteresis Level


0 0 Db
1 2 dB
2 4 dB
3 6 dB
4 8 dB
5 10 dB
6 12 dB
7 14 dB

Note: Set Reselect Hysteresis to 4 or 5 (reselect Hysteresis power level


is 8 dB or 10 dB) and make some adjustment in following cases:
Increase cell reselection parameters of adjacent cells with different LAC
in the area when there are a large number of services in an area and
signaling traffic overload often occurs. Increase cell reselection
parameters if adjacent cells belonging to different location areas have
a wide range of coverage. Set cell reselection parameters to 13
(reselection power level is between 2 dB and 6 dB) if adjacent cells
belong to different LAC having poor coverage.
Default value: 4
9. Maxmium number of repeating times for sending physical information
messages (Ny1)
Description: BTS sends message RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION
to notify MS advanced time value that will be used during
asynchronous handover process to be in accordance with GSM
specifications. BTS starts the timer T3105 after the message RIL3_RR
PHYSICAL INFORMATION is sent once. BTS will resend message
RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION and restart the timer T3105 if the
timer expires and fails to decode the frames in second layer correctly
(format A or format B) or TCH frames. The parameter Ny1 (the Max
Number of Repetition) decides maxmium number of resending times
for the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message. This is one of
the BTS parameters.
Value range: 5 ~ 35
Default value: 5
10. Notification CCCH Message Period (PrdCLI)
Description: BTS will periodically send message CCCH LOAD
INDICATION to BSC till CCCH channel is no longer over the threshold

72 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

value when CCCH channel (RACH and PCH channels among them) load
level of BTS exceeds a threshold value (overload) set by O&M to be in
accordance with the GSM specifications. Among them, the period for
sending the message CCCH LOAD INDICATION depends on this
parameter, which is one of BTS parameters.
Value range: 1 ~ 255 (in the unit of 102TDMA frame)
Default value: 10
11. Received RACH Received power level threshold (RbusyThs)
Description: The threshold for receiving signal level in RACH bursts if
the value is exceeded (that is less than - RachBusyThs dBm). It will be
considered as a busy RACH.
Value range: 1 ~ 63.
See Table 56 for value range of RbusyThs.

T ABLE 56 V ALUE RANGE OF RBUSYTHS

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110-109
2 -109-108

61 -50-49
62 -49-48
63 > -48

Default value: 40
12. TA Max (TAMAX)
Description: Maximum TA supported by the extended carrier frequency
Value range: 0 ~ 219
13. TA Allowed (TaAllowed)
Description: Permitted Maximum TA that allows MS access to this cell.
Value range: Expansion cell: 0 ~ 219; Common cell: 0 ~ 63
14. BCCH
Description: BCCH is the absolute frequency point number of carrier
frequency.
Value range; Value is taken within frequency point range set by BSC
broadcast range according to setting of network plan report.
15. Radio Frequency (CaArfcnList)
Description: The aggregate of the radio frequency of the BTS
Value range: Frequency point set, and the value range of each
frequency point is the same as BCCH

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 73


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

16. PLMN Table (NccPermitted)


Description: This indicates the PLMN table that allows MS to report the
measurement results.
Value range: Collection of NCC values, and value range of each
element is 0 ~ 7
Default value: [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]
17. Whether to support GPRS (PsSupprt)
Description: This parameter indicates if the cell supports GPRS
Value range: 0: not support; 1: support
Note: Set according to actual situations
18. Network Service Entity Identifier (NSEI)
Description: Each GPRS cell at the BSSGP layer of the GPRS protocol
stack is assigned with one BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC)
(NSEI+BVCI) to facilitate the management. Each BVC must belong to
one NSE. NSE is the network service entity. It is numbered uniformly
in the entire network, marked with NSEI. Generally, one BSC is divided
into one service entity. In view of expandability, the ZXG10 system
also allows BSC to be attached with several NSEs.
Value range: 0 ~ 0xFFFF
Note: Uniformly planned by the network operator
19. BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier (BVC No.)
Description: BSSGP Virtual Connection (BVC) provides an approach for
the communications among different BSSGP entities. The peer-to-peer
Point-to-Point (PTP) or Point-to-Multipoint PTM or inter-signaling entity
transmission of BSSGP PDUs is based on BVC. Each virtual connection
has one identifier, that is, BVCI. It enables the network service layer at
the bottom layer to route BSSGP PDUs to the peer entity very
effectively. Each GPRS cell in one NSE can be identified by a BVCI
uniquely. One NSE has only one piece of signaling BVC (BVCI=0).
Value range: 0 ~ 65535
Note: Uniformly planned by the network operator
20. Route Area Code (RAC)
Description: GPRS system further divides the location area to several
routing areas that are identified by RAI (MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC), like
the GSM system using the location area to manage a group of cells. In
case of MS cell reselection in attach state, if the RAIs of the old and
new cells change, Routing area update procedure is initiated. MS and
SGSN in Standby state know the routing area information, thus when
the network has the packet data or circuit data to transmit, it pages
MS in that routing area. RAI cannot span more than one SGSN.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Note: Uniformly planned by the network operator.
21. PUC MUnit No. (SPCUMUNIT)
Description: The composite unit No. of SPCU corresponding to a cell.

74 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Value range: 0 ~ 255, and 0 indicates that the SPCU composite unit
is not configured
22. BRP Group (BRPGROUP)
Description: BRP group related to the cell in the interface.
Value range: 1 ~ 6
23. Whether to support dynamic HR (DynalHREnable)
Value range: True: Dynamic HR enabled; False: Dynamic HR disabled
Default range: False
24. Channel Select Priority
Value range: 0 ~ 2

Basic Parameters 2
1. Survey Average Burst Count by RACH (AvgSlots)
Description: The number of bursts measured on RACH. RACH channel
is overloaded if some receiving signal levels of AvgSlots BP are less
than the RachBusyThs. It is a parameter used by BTS.
Value range: 0 ~ 100
Default value: 60
2. Bss Link Layer Error Counter Maximal (BsRadioLKTmOut)
Description: Maxmium value of the counter S that measures the radio
link faults on BSS side
Value range: 0 ~ 15
Default value: 15
3. Ms Link Layer Error Counter Maximal (MsRadioLKTmOut)
Description: Maxmium value of the counter S that measures the radio
link faults on MS side
Value range: 0 ~ 15
Default value: 15
4. MS Get the Minimal Intensity When Visit this Cell (RxLevAccessMin)
Description: It is minimal receiving level to allow MS to access the cell.
It is prescribed in GSM system that the receiving level be greater than
a threshold for MS to access the network, that is, MS Min RxLev to
Access (minimum receiving level for MS to access the network). It
prevents MS from accessing the system at a low receiving signal level
(the poor communication quality usually cannot guarantee normal
communications after access), and from unreasonably wasting the
radio sources of network. In addition, it is one of the criteria for MS to
select and reselect the cell. The parameter will be broadcasted to all
MSs in a cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and
TYPE4 messages. RxLevAccessMin is also one of cell selection
parameters.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 75


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: 063. See Table 57 for value range of MS get minimal
intensity when visit this cell.

T ABLE 57 V ALUE RANGE OF M S GET M INIM AL I NTENSITY W HEN VISIT THIS CELL

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110-109


62 -49-48
63 > -48

Note: It is better for the value to be approximately to MS receiving


sensitivity. The cell RxLevAccessMin may be relatively increased to
decrease C1 and C2 values of the cell and along with the cell effective
coverage range for some cells with overloaded traffic, but
RxLevAccessMin value cannot be too large. Otherwise, blind area
will be created at the cell boundaries factitiously. Level value is better
not to exceed -90 dbm when the measure is adopted to balance the
traffic. This parameter can be usually set as 10 (that is, from -101
dBm to -100 dBm) or lower at the preliminary running stage of the
network, which is higher than MS receiving sensitivity -102 dBm.
However, this parameter of the cell can be increased by 2 (dB) when
the network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage in a cell is not
a problem.
Default value: 12 (-99 dbm to -98 dbm)
5. RACH Load Indication Threshold (RLIT)
Description: BTS will periodically send the message CCCH LOAD
INDICATION to BSC till the CCCH channel is no longer over the
threshold value when the CCCH channel (the RACH channel among
them) load level of BTS is over a threshold value (overload) set by
O&M to be in accordance with the GSM specifications. Among them,
the threshold depends on the parameter CcchLoadThs. This is one of
BTS parameters.
Value range: 0 ~ 100
See Table 58 for value range of RACH load indication threshold.

T A B L E 5 8 V A L U E R A N G E O F R AC H L O A D I N D I C A T I O N T H R E S H O L D

Value Meaning
0 CCCH load percentage 0%
1 CCCH load percentage 1%

100 CCCH load percentage 100%

6. PCH Load Indication Threshold (PLIT)

76 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Description: BTS will periodically send the CCCH LOAD INDICATION


message to BSC till the CCCH channel is no longer over the threshold
value when the CCCH channel (the PCH channel among them) load
level of BTS is over a threshold value (overload) set by O&M to be in
accordance with the GSM specifications. Among them, the threshold
depends on the parameter CcchLoadThs. This is one of the
configuration parameters of BTS.
Value range: 0 ~100
See Table 59 for value range of PCH load indication threshold.

T ABLE 59 V ALUE RANGE OF PCH L OAD INDICATION THRESHOLD

Value Meaning
0 CCCH load percentage 0%
1 CCCH load percentage 1%

63 CCCH load percentage 63%


100 CCCH load percentage 100%

7. Maximal Retransmission Times on RACH Last Access (MaxRetrans)


Description: MS will send the channel request message in the RACH
channel to the network when MS starts the immediate assignment
process (such as a MS needing to update the location, originate a call
or respond paging). The network enables MS to send multiple channel
request messages before it receives the immediate assignment
message to improve the access success rate of MS, for RACH is an
ALOHA channel. Maxmium number of allowed resending times depends
on the MaxRetrans. This parameter notifies MS in the cell via
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4. The
MaxRetrans is one of the control parameters of the system.
Value range: See Table 60 for value range of MaxRetrans.

T ABLE 60 V ALUE RANGE OF M AXRETRANS

Value MaxRetrans
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 7

Note: Following methods are available to set MaxRetrans:


It can be set as 3 (that is, maximum number of resending times is
7) for the cell radius over 3km and the area with small traffic, to
improve the access success rate of MS.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 77


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

It can be set as 2 (that is, maxmium number of resending times is


4) for the cell radius less than 3km and the area with common
traffic.
It can be set as 1 (that is, maxmium number of resending times is
2) for the micro cellular.
It can be set as 0 (that is, maxmium number of resending times is
1) for the micro cell with heavy traffic and the cell with obvious
congestion.
Default value: 2
8. Ms Max Transmit Power When Access (MTPMax)
Description: The transmission power is controlled by the network
during the communication between MS and BTS. The network sets the
power for MS via the power command and the command is transmitted
on SACCH (the SACCH has 2 header bytes, one is the power control
byte and the other is the lead time byte). MS must extract the power
control header from downward SACCH and takes the specified
transmission power as output power. It will output the closest
transmission power that can be output if the power level of MS cannot
output the power value. It must be used with other channels, such as
SDCCH, TCH, for SACCH is the associated channel signal. MS power
control by the network actually begins after MS receives SACCH. The
power (that is, the power used when the channel request is sent on
RACH) used by MS before receiving SACCH depends on the control
channel maximum power level MsTxPwrMaxCch. The
MsTxPwrMaxCch is also a parameter for cell selection and reselection
by MS, involving in calculation of C1 and C2 values. This parameter is
broadcasted to all the MSs in the cell via RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages, which is one of the cell
selection parameters.
Value range: See Table 61 for value range of MS max transmit power
when access.

T AB L E 6 1 V AL U E R AN G E O F M S M AX T R AN S M I T P O W E R W H E N AC C E S S

GSM900 GSM1800
Value Output Power of MS (dBm) Value Output Power of MS (dBm)
02 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
5 33 0 30

17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
1931 5 1528 0

78 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Note: MS near BTS will interfere with the neighboring channels if this
parameter is set to a large value. MS at the cell boundary will have low
access success rate if it is too small. Reduce MS access under the
precondition that MS at the cell boundary is guaranteed certain access
success rate, if possible. The larger the cell coverage, the higher is MS
output power level. This parameter is usually set at 5 corresponding to
GSM900MS and 0 for the GSM1800MS. Make a dial test at the cell
boundary after the parameter is set in practical applications, and test
MS access success rate and access time with different parameter
settings to determine whether to increase or decrease the value of this
parameter.
Default value: 2
9. AGCH Model Count (BsAgBlkRes)
Description: This is the amount of blocks used for AGCH in the 51
multiple frames (BS-AG-BLK-RES). Table 62 shows the CCCH channel
information blocks contained in each BCCH multi-frame (51 frames
contained) in case of different CCCH configurations. The number of
blocks reserved to allow access channel in the CCCH channel message
blocks on the network must be set, for CCCH channels contain both the
allowed access channel and paging channel. The system message of
each cell contains a configuration parameter to make this configuration
information known to MS, that is, the access allowed reserved blocks
can be calculated via CCCHConf and BsAgBlkRe for the number of
BsAgBlkRes blocks of PCH. This parameter can be dynamically
adjusted during the actual running according to the load status of
different common channels. It is the broadcast to all MSs in the cell
through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message.
Value range: See Table 62 for value range of AGCH model count.

T A B L E 6 2 V A L U E R A N G E O F AG C H M O D E L C O U N T

Number of AGCH Blocks Number of PCH Blocks


CCCH_CO BS_AG_B
Reserved in Each BCCH Multi- Reserved in Each BCCH
NF LK_RES
frame Multi-frame
0 0 3
1 1 2
1 2 2 1
Others
- -
(illegal)
0 0 9
1 1 8
2 2 7
3 3 6
Others
4 4 5
5 5 4
6 6 3
7 7 2

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 79


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Default value: 1 (CcchConf = 1); 2 (CcchConf = other values)


10. Call Team Account for Multiframe Count (BsPamframs)
Description: The multi-frame quantity (BS-PA-MFRMS) is given to the
51 TDMA frames of MS in the same paging group by the transmission
paging message. In accordance with the GSM specifications, each
mobile subscriber (that is, corresponding to each IMSI) belongs to one
paging group, and each paging group in every cell is corresponding to
one paging sub-channel. MS calculates its paging group in the light of
its own IMSI, so that the paging sub-channel location that of belonging
to the paging group will be calculated. In the actual network, MS only
tunes in the paging sub-channel to which it belongs and ignores the
contents of other paging sub-channels, and shuts off the power supply
of some hardware equipment in MS to save the power overhead of MS.
The multi-frame quantity (BsPaMframs) of the paging channel means
how many multiple frames will act as one cycle for the paging sub-
channel. Actually, the parameter determines how many sub-channel
calculations will be allocated for the paging channel in a cell. This
parameter is used by MS to calculate the paging group in which it is
located, so that related paging sub-channel can be monitored. This
parameter is broadcasted to all MS in the cell via the message
SYSTEM INFORMATION. BsPaMframs is broadcasted to MS in the cell
via the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message.
BsPaMframs is one of the system control parameters.
Value range: See Table 63 for value range of call team account for
Multiframe count.

T AB L E 6 3 V AL U E R AN G E O F C AL L T E AM AC C O U N T F O R M U L T I F R AM E C O U N T

Number of Multi-frames Cycled on Same Paging Channel in


Value
Same Paging Group
0 2
1 3
2 4
3 5
4 6
5 7
6 8
7 9

Note: The parameter must be as small as possible under condition of


guaranteeing paging channel without overload. This parameter is
generally 6 or 7 (that is, 8 or 9 multiple frames will be a cycle for the
paging group) for the area with heavy traffic. This parameter can be
set at 4 or 5 (that is, 6 or 7 multi-frame will be a cycle for the paging
group) for the area with modest traffic. This parameter can be set at 2
or 3 (that is, 4 or 5 multiple frames can be a cycle for paging group)
for the area with less traffic.
Default value: 2

80 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

11. Most Time Interval of MR Resend at RACH (T3122)


Description: The network will send Immediate assignment deny
message to MS after the network receives the channel request
message sent by MS and if there is no proper channel to be allocated
to the MS. The timer parameter T3122 will be contained in the
Immediate assignment deny message to avoid MS continuously
sending the channel request that will result in further congestion of
radio channel, that is, the waiting indication information unit. MS must
wait for a time indicated by T3122 before starting a new call after
receiving Immediately assign rejection message. This parameter is
also one of the system control parameters and is sent to MS in
Immediately assign rejection message.
See Table 64 for most time interval of MR resend at RACH (T3122).

T A B L E 6 4 V A L U E R A N G E O F M O S T T I M E I N T E R V A L O F M R R E S E N D A T R AC H ( T 3 1 2 2 )

T3122 Meaning
0 0s
1 1s
2 2s

255 255 s

Usually, it is better to set T3122 as 10 s ~ 15 s, and 15 s ~25 s for the


area with dense traffic.
Default value: 10

Optional Parameters
1. Whether to allow IMSI attach/detach (Attach/Detach)
Description: IMSI Attach/detach Allowed, ATT in a cell. IMSI detaching
process means that MS reports entering non-working status to the
network, that is, switch-off or the process to take the SIM card out
from the MS. The network (normally VLR) marks the IMSI subscriber in
a non-working status, and the called connection request of the
subscriber will be denied now, so it is unnecessary to page.
Accordingly, the attaching process of IMSI means that MS reports
entering working status to the network or reinserting the SIM card into
the MS, and MS checks whether the LAI that of MS located is
consistent with the original one saved. Start the IMSI attaching
process if so and start the location updating process if not. The
network marks the working status of the subscriber when receiving the
IMSI attaching or the location update process. This parameter is
contained in the information unit Control channel description for
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 81


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: True: Enabling MS attach/detach in a cell; False:


Disabling MS attach/detach in a cell
Note: The parameters of different cells in the same location area
should be the same.
Default value: True
2. Cell Bar Access (CellBarAccess)
Description: PLMN carriers can determine whether to allow MS residing
in a specific cell (for instance, the area being under the test or only for
the area to attract handover traffic). This parameter notifies MS in the
cell via RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4
message. CellBarAccess is combined with CellBarQulify (cell disable
limit) deciding the priority of the cell selection and reselection.
Default value: False
3. Allow Downlink DTX (DtxDwlink)
Description: DTX that is applied in the downlink direction is an optional
process of BSC. Discontinuous transmission (DTX) refers to the process
where the system does not transmit signals in the speech dialogue
period during the subscriber communication process. This parameter
involves controlling the DTX mode applied in the downlink direction.
Practically, whether to apply DTX (the messages CHANNEL
ACTIVATION and MODE MODIFY given to BTS) in the downlink
direction will be jointly decided by the parameter plus if the indication
about downlink direction will be used in the messages ASSIGNMENT
REQUEST and HANDOVER REQUEST of the MSC.
Value range: True: Downlink DTX can be used; False: Downlink DTX
cannot be used
Default value: True
4. Allow Call Reestablish In Cell (CallReestablish)
Description: MS can originate call re-establishment process to restore
the call if the network has the right to allow call re-establishment, for
blind spot caused by burst-out interference or high-rise building will
result in call disconnection due to radio link fault. This function is
implemented via setting the parameter CallReestablish. This
parameter is broadcasted to MS in the cell via the messages RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4, which is one of the
network function parameters.
Value range: True: Call establishment is allowed in the cell; False: Call
establishment is not allowed in the cell
Default value: False
5. Allow Emergency Call (EmergencyCall)
Description: Generally, any MS on the GSM network must have a valid
subscriber identification module card (SIM) to get various service
supports from the network. Carriers have the right to decide whether
to allow MS making an Emergency Call (EC), such as burglar alarm for
MS without a SIM card or MS with a SIM but its access level (one of
levels from C0~C9) has been closed by current cell (that is, it cannot
start the access program according to the system message of the

82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

current cell). This function is implemented via setting the


EmergencyCall parameter. This parameter is broadcasted to MS in
the cell via the messages RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1, 2,
2bis, 3 and 4, which is one of the network function parameters.
Values: True: MS with the access level 0~9 is not allowed to make an
emergency call, and MS with the access level 11~15 is also not allowed
to make an emergency call if its related access control bit is T; False:
Emergency call is allowed for all MSs.
Note: the emergency call phone number is defined as 112 in GSM
specifications, which is different from China telephone number
assignment. However, 112, on the network, generally connects the
voice announcement telephone, notifying subscribers various special
service numbers. Therefore, EC setting is False, that is, the
emergency call is allowed.
Default value: False
6. T3212 timer: periodical location update timer
Description: There are two major causes in GSM system, resulting in
location update. One is that MS found out its location area changed
(different LAC), and the other is that the network specifies MS to
periodically update its location. The interval for periodic location
updating is controlled by the network and the duration depends on the
T3212 timer. This parameter is broadcast to all MSs in the cell via
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message. T3212 timer is one
of the system control parameters.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
See Table 65 for value range of T3212 timer.

T ABLE 65 V ALUE RANGE OF T3212 TIMER

T3212 Time Indicated (min.) Time Indicated (hr.)


0 Infinite (without location updating) Infinite (without location updating)
1 6 0.1
2 12 0.2

254 1524 25.4


255 1530 25.5

Note: The setting of this parameter will affect the overall service
performance and utilization rate of radio resources of the network. As
to the area with relatively high traffic, a higher cycle can be chosen
(that is, 16 or 20 hours, even 25 hours). T3212 can be relatively small
(such as 3 or 6 hours) for the area with ordinary traffic. And it is better
to set T3212 as 0 for the area with extreme overload traffic.
Default value: 10

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 83


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

7. Cell Bar Qualify (CellBarQualify)


Description: Carriers hope that MS preferably selects some cells in the
cell selection according to the capacity, traffic and functional difference
of each cell for overlapped areas in a cell, that is, set the priority of the
cell. This function can be implemented via setting the CellBarQualify
parameter. The Cell disable limit is to set the cell priority in some
special cases. This parameter is broadcasted to all the MSs in the cell
via the messages RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and
TYPE4, which is one of the cell selection parameters. Whether this
parameter is valid will depend on CellReselPI.
Value range: See Table 66 for value range of cell bar qualify.

T ABLE 66 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL BAR QUALIFY

CellBarQualify CellBarAccess Cell selection Cell ReseLection Status


Priority
F F Normal Normal
F T Barred Barred
T F Low Normal
T T Low Normal

Note: CellBarAccess is normally set as F, and CellBarQulify is also


set as F, that is, the cell priority is set as normal. Carriers may hope
that MS preferably enter some types of cells, set the priority of this cell
type as Normal, while the priorities of other cells are set as Low, in
some cases, such as micro cellular application, dual-frequency
networking, etc. This setting will not affect the cell reselection.
Default value: False
8. MS Type Can not Visit Cell (AccessControl)
Description: All MSs in GSM system have an access class (15 classes in
total). The MSs with the class ranging between 0 and 9 are common
ones, while those with the class ranging between 11 and 15 are special
MSs (no access class 10). Therefore, the system can disable the MSs
with certain access classes to access the cell (for example during the
installation commissioning or the congestion control). These pieces of
information can reach MS inside the cell in RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3 and 4 messages through the
AccessControl parameter. AccessControl is also one of the system
control parameters. The degree of congestion for any CCCH or
processor overload during congestion control can be reduced by
temporarily prohibiting one type or multiple types of subscribers from
accessing the system (for subscribers of access levels 0~9). Generally
speaking, the system will have the following overload conditions:
RACH overload is found in the CCCH LOAD INDICATION message
and processed by BSS according to the standard GSM08.58
AGCH overload is found in DELETE INDICATION message first,
and handled by BSS by not sending IMMEDIATE REJECT message

84 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

PCH overload is found in CCCH LOAD INDICATION message, and


the BSS will not make any process but notify the MSC
Other types of overload is found in the OVERLOAD message, for
example, MTP overload
Value range: False: MS with corresponding access level is not barred
and can be accessed by the cell; True: MS with corresponding access
level is barred and cannot be accessed by the cell.
Default value: C0 ~ C15 (excluding C10). It is usually set as True. Try
to reduce unnecessary impact on the installation or maintenance
during the commission or maintenance and test in some cells.

Cell Selection Parameters


1. Additional Reselection PI (AdditionalReselPI)
Description: The cell selection and reselection of MS depends on the
parameter C1 and C2, according to the definition in the GSM
specification. Network carriers decide whether to use C2 as the cell
reselection parameter. AdditionReselPI (Additional Reselect Param Ind,
ACS) is to notify MS whether C2 is adopted during the cell reselection.
This parameter is broadcasted to MS in the cell via the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4 messages, which is one of
the cell selection parameters.
Value range: False: MS takes off cell reselection parameter PI and the
parameters related to computing C2 if the rest bytes SI4 Rest Octets
in SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE4 message exist; True: MS takes off
cell reselection parameter PI and the parameters related to computing
C2 from the rest bytes SI7/8 Rest Octets of SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE 7 or 8
Note: Generally, the system messages 7 and 8 are seldom used. Set
the AdditionReselPI as False normally. AdditionReselPI is set as
True when the system adopts the system messages 7 and 8, and the
cell reselection uses C2.
Default value: false
2. Cell Reselection PI (C2) (CellReselPI)
Description: The cell reselection parameter index is employed to notify
MS whether to use the C2 as the cell reselection parameter and if there
is the parameter for calculating C2. Indicate whether related
parameter for calculating cell reselection standard C2 contained in the
message SYSTEM INFORMATION message and whether C2 standard
is adopted in the cell reselection. The successive ReselOff,
TempOffset and PenalTim are invalid, and MS takes C1 as the cell
reselection standard when this value is False. This parameter will be
broadcasted to all MS in the cell in the messages RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4. CellReselPI is one of the cell
selection parameters.
Value range: False: MS regards parameter C1 as a cell reselection
standard. Parameters CellBarQualify, ReselOffset, TemporaryOffset,

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 85


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

and PenaltyTime are invalid; True: MS should get parameters to


compute C2 from cell broadcast system messages and regard C2 as a
cell reselection standard. Parameters CellBarQualify, ReselOffset,
TemporaryOffset, and PenaltyTime are invalid
Note: CellReselPI must be set as True if related cell adopts C2 as the
cell reselection standard. Otherwise, it is set as False.
Default value: True
3. Cell Reselection Offset (CRO) (ReselOffset)
Description: The cell reselect caused by the radio channel quality takes
the C2 as the standard. The C2 is formed according to C1 parameter
plus some factitious offset parameters, to add the factitious influence
as to encourage MS to enter some cells in priority, or to block MS from
entering some cells. Usually, such measures are all adopted to balance
the traffic on the network. Besides C1, there are three factors affecting
C2: ReselOffset, TemporaryOffset, and PenaltyTime. The ReselOffset
(Cell Reselect Offset, CRO) is a magnitude value, which indicates the
factitious modified value to C2. To calculate a modification value of the
cell C2 reselect standard is to factitiously encourage or block MS to
enter a cell, so that the network balance can be realized. This
parameter is broadcasted to all the MSs in the cell via the messages
RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4, which is one of
the cell selection parameters. Whether this parameter is valid depends
on CellReselPI.
Value range: See Table 67 for value range of cell reselection offset
(CRO).

T ABLE 67 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL RESELECTION OFFSET (CRO)

Value Related Level Value Represented (dB)


0 0
1 2
2 4

62 124
63 126

Note: The cell reselect offset (ReselOffset), the temporary offset


(TemporaryOffset) and the penalty time (PenaltyTime). The settings of
three parameters can be divided into three cases:
MS is expected not to work in the cell (that is, certain repulsion to
that cell) with large traffic or poor communication quality due to
certain causes. The PenaltyTime can be set as 31 in such cases.
The parameter TemporaryOffset is invalid, and the numerical
value of C2 equals C1 minus Reseloffset. Therefore, the C2 value
corresponding to the cell is factitiously decreased, and it reduces
the possibility that MS takes the cell as the reselected one. Besides,
the proper ReselOffset can be set according to the repellent

86 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

condition of the cell. The more repellent, the larger ReselOffset.


Vice versa in case of a smaller ReselOffset.
MS is normally encouraged to work in that cell (that is, certain
propensity to that cell) for cells with small traffic and low
equipment utilization. ReselOffset is better to be set between 0 ~
10 (corresponding to 020 db) in this case, according to tendency
condition of the cell. The more tendency, the larger ReselOffset.
Vice versa in case of a smaller ReselOffset. It is usually better to
set the TemporaryOffset same as ReselOffset, or a little higher than
ReselOffse. The main function of PenaltyTime is to avoid frequent
cell reselection of MS, and the commonly recommended setting is 0
(20 seconds) or 1 (40 seconds) (the 1800 cell of dual-frequency
network is such a case).
ReselOffset is set as 0 and PenaltyTime as 31 for cells with
ordinary traffic. C2 is equal to C1, that is, without human factors on
the cell.
Default value: 0
4. Temp Offset (TO) (TemporaryOffset)
Description: The cell reselect caused by the radio channel quality takes
the C2 as the standard. The C2 is formed according to parameter C1
plus some factitious offset parameters, to add the factitious influence is
to encourage MS to enter some cells in priority, or to block MS entering
some cells. Usually, such measures are all adopted to balance the
traffic on the network. Besides C1, there are three factors affecting C2:
ReselOffset, TemporaryOffset, and PenaltyTime. The TemporaryOffset
indicates the temporary modification value for C2. What temporary
means that it only acts on C2 for a period of time and the period
depends on parameter PenaltyTime. This parameter is broadcasted to
all MSs in the cell via messages RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE3 and TYPE4, which is one of the cell selection parameters.
Whether this parameter is valid depends on CellReselPI.
Value range: See Table 68 for value range of temp offset (TO).

T ABLE 68 V ALUE RANGE OF TEMP OFFSET (TO)

Value Related Level Value Represented (dB)


0 0
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50
6 60
7 Infinity

Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 87


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

5. Penalty Time (PT) (PenaltyTime)


Description: The cell reselect caused by radio channel quality takes C2
as standard. C2 is formed according to parameter C1 plus some
factitious offset parameters, to add the factitious influence is to
encourage MS to enter some cells in priority, or to block MS from
entering certain cells. Usually, such measures are all adopted to
balance the traffic on a network. Besides C1, there are three factors
affecting C2: ReselOffset, TemporaryOffset, and PenaltyTime. The
TemporaryOffset indicates the temporary modification value for C2.
What temporary means is that it only acts on C2 for a time, and that
time frame depends on the parameter PenaltyTime. This parameter is
broadcasted to all the MSs in the cell via the messages RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4, which is one of the cell
selection parameters. Whether this parameter is valid depends on
CellReselPI.
Value range: See Table 69 for value range of penalty time (PO).

T ABLE 69 V ALUE RANGE OF PENALTY TIME (PO)

Value The Time Value Represented (second)


0 20
1 40
2 60

29 600
30 620
TemporaryOffset is invalid, and the action direction of
31
ReselOffset is reversed

Default value: 20
6. Early Class Mark Transmission Control (ECSC)
Description: MS will transmit appended class mark information
(Classmark 3) to the network via the CLASSMARK CHANGE message
as soon as possible according to the GSM specifications, when a MS is
equipped with the ECSC function that is also supported by the network
and after it is assigned. Whether the network supports ECSC function
depends on ECSC parameter. The parameter is broadcasted to the
MSs in the cell via RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message.
Value range: False: Disabling MS early class mark transmission; True:
Enabling MS early class mark transmission
Note: Set ECSC as True if there is another frequency section in
adjacent cell for handover or the cell is an expanded GSM cell, and the
network supports the ECSC function. Otherwise, it will be set as False.
Default value: True

88 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

7. Hardware Support Half Rate (NECI)


Description: The service channels in the GSM system can fall into
channels with full rate and channels with half rate according to GSM
specifications. Common GSM systems all support channels with full
rate. Whether the network supports half rate service depends on the
network operators. The new setup reason denotes the NECI to notify
MS if the area supports the half rate service. The parameter notifies
MS via the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4
messages, which is one of networks functional parameters.
Value range: False: The cell does not support half rate service access;
True: The cell supports half rate service access
Default value: False
8. MS Power Offset (PwrOffsetInd)
i. Power Offset Index
Description: Transmission power to send access request message
on RACH is to add an offset value according to MsTxPwrMaxCCH
value for the Class 3 MS of GSM1800, which depends on
PwrOffset parameter. Whether the offset value is necessary
depends on parameter PwrOffsetInd, that is, the PwrOffsetInd
parameter decides whether the parameter of PwrOffse is valid.
The parameter is broadcasted to the MSs in the cell via RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Value range: False: invalid PwrOffset; True: valid PwrOffset
Default value: False
ii. Power Offset Value
Description: The transmission power sending an access request
message on RACH channel is to add an offset value according to
MsTxPwrMaxCCH value in GSM specifications, for MS of Class 3
GSM1800. Modification value depends on the parameter of
P w r O f f s e t . Whether the offset value is necessary depends on the
P w r O f f s e t I n d parameter, that is, parameter of P w r O f f s e t I n d
decides whether the parameter of P w r O f f s e is valid. The
parameter of P w r O f f s e t also affects MS calculating cell selection
and cell reselection standards C1 and C2. The parameter is
broadcasted to the MSs in the cell via RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3, 4, 7 and 8 messages.
Value range: See Table 70 for value range of power offset.

T ABLE 70 V ALUE RANGE OF POWER OFFSET

Value Offset Power Represented (dB)


0 0
1 2
2 4
3 6

Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 89


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Service Process Additional


Parameters Use Directed Retry

Description: Whether to use directed retry. It will assign a service


channel for MS in an adjacent cell according to the measurement
report from MS during the assignment, if there is no service channel to
be allocated in the service cell while the system adopts the directed
retry. This is a special handover process that can reduce the call drop
rate. The directed retry can be sorted as the directed retry in BSC and
between BSCs, the former is not required of the MSC but the latter
does require MSCs support.
Value range: False: Directed retry is not used; True: Directed retry is
used
Default value: False
2. Allow Queue when Assign (QueueInd0)
Description: The parameter decides whether queuing can be performed
in the assignment process and when there is no channel available in
the cell.
Value range: True/False
Default value: False
3. Allow Queue when Handover (QueueInd1)
Description: The parameter decides whether queuing can be performed
during a handover process and when there are no available channels in
the cell.
Value range: True/False
Default value: False
4. Assign Remove Mark and HandOver Remove Mark (PreemptionInd0)
Description: Whether forced disconnection is allowed during the
assignment and handover. Forced disconnection process: Those
connections that are liable to be damaged can be forcedly disconnected
(handover) to allocate their resources to the assignments or handover
request with higher priority when the priority in the assignment
request or handover is valid and the preemption is valid. Whether a
call is easily damaged will be shown in assignment requests and
handover.
Value range: See Table 71 for value range of assignment remove mark
and HandOver remove mark.

T AB L E 7 1 V AL U E R AN G E S O F AS S I G N R E M O V E M AR K ( C H O O S E , D AM AG E ) AN D
HANDO VER REMOVE M ARK (CHOOSE, DAM AGE)

Value Meaning

90 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Preemption Remove Mark for True: assignment request allowed remove


Assignment (Choose, Damage) False: assignment request disallowed remove.
Preemption Mark for Handover True: handover request allowed remove
(Choose, Damage) False: handover request disallowed remove.

Default value: False (for both Assign Remove Mark and HandOver
Remove Mark).
5. Allow Rapid Average after Power Control(FastAvg)
Description: The corresponding handover and power control may not
be performed during the calling process due to less measured data.
The process of calculating average value can be enabled, for these
processes generally require values that can be measured reach a
certain window size, for example, when the window size to calculate
average value is 8. Common average process will not take place, for
the BSC has only received 5 measured values. BSC will directly
calculate the average of the 5 measured values if the fast average
process is adopted. There are two cases resulting in insufficient data
for calculating the average value, that is, call establishment period,
after handover and after power control. It is necessary to point out
that, after the power control is performed once, former measured
values are discarded in situations where they could result in an error
control (measured values without the influence on handover control
are still existing). In addition, old measured values are discarded after
the handover has occurred keeping it from causing error control (the
forward and backward cells are in the same BSC).
Value range: False: Disabling Rapid Average after Power Control; True:
Enabling Rapid Average after Power Control.
Default value: False
6. Allow FACCH Call Setup after Emergency Call/Allow FACCH Call Setup
when Page Respond/Allow Call Setup on FACCH/Allow Call Reestablish
on FACCH(FacchCallInd1)
Description: BSC can allocate the TCH channel accordingly when a MS
attempts to access the network, and there is no SDCCH available in
the cell.
Value range: See Table 72 for value range of FACCH call setup.

T A B L E 7 2 V A L U E R A N G E O F F AC C H C A L L S E T U P

Parameter Meaning

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 91


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Parameter Meaning
1: The emergency call allows the FACCH call establishment
Allow FACCH Call Setup after process
Emergency Call 0: The emergency call does not allow the FACCH call
establishment process
1: The response paging allows the FACCH call establishment
Allow FACCH Call Setup process
when Page Respond 0: The response paging does not allow the FACCH call
establishment process
1: The originating call allows the FACCH call establishment
process
Allow Call Setup on FACCH
0: The originating call does not allow the FACCH call
establishment process
1: The call re-setup allows the FACCH call establishment
Allow Call Reestablish on process
FACCH 0: The call re-setup does not allow the FACCH call setup
process

Default value: True for all


7. Optimize TxPwr (OptTxPwrInd)
Description: Introducing the concept of signal level optimization, the
transmission power of the mobile phone and the BS can be optimized
after the assignment and handover of mobile phone and BS (including
the directed retry). It can avoid increased interference of entire GSM
system caused by maximum transmission power, or failure of mobile
phone access and reduction of system call completion ratio caused by
smaller transmission power (when it is intra-cell handover or when
assigning). It is an optional item. The parameter OptTxPwrInd is to
decide whether relevant function of optimization transmission power is
enabled. It is necessary to point out that optimization of uplink
transmission power is related to smallest acceptable CCI allocated by
the channel. Moreover, the parameter also decides validity of
parameters OptRxLevUL and OptRxLevDL, that is, when a process
in uplink/downlink direction requires to be optimized.
Value range: See Table 73 for value range of optimize TxPwr.

92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T ABLE 73 V ALUE RANGE OF OPTIMIZE TXPWR

Parameter Meaning
1: Optimize the transmission power when assigning in uplink
Optimize TxPwr when direction
Uplink Assign 0: Not performing the transmission power optimization when
assigning in uplink direction
1: Optimize the transmission power when the handover internal
cell and in uplink direction(including the concentric handover)
Optimize TxPwr when
Uplink intra-Cell HandOver 0: Not optimize the transmission power when the handover in
the cell and in uplink direction (including the concentric
handover)
1: Optimize the transmission power when the handover between
Optimize TxPwr when cells in uplink direction(including the directed retry)
Uplink Inter-Cell HandOver 0: Not optimize the transmission power when the handover
between cells in uplink direction(including the directed retry)
1: Optimize the transmission power when assigning in downlink
Optimize TxPwr when direction
Downlink Assign 0: Not optimize the transmission power when assigning in
downlink direction
1: Optimize the transmission power when the handover internal
Optimize TxPwr when cell and in downlink direction (including the concentric handover)
Downlink Intra-Cell 0: Not optimize the transmission power when the handover
HandOver internal cell and in downlink direction (including the concentric
handover)
1: Optimize the transmission power when the handover between
Optimize TxPwr when cells in downlink direction(including the directed retry)
Downlink Inter-Cell
HandOver 0: Not optimize the transmission power when the handover
between cells in downlink direction (including the directed retry)

Default value: False for all the above


8. Allow to Assign from SDCCH to TCH of Special TRX (CiAssignInd)
Description: Whether to perform the assignment process from the
SDCCH to the TCH of the special TRX. MS can be directly assigned
from SDCCH to TCH channel on special TRX to avoid the call drop
according to C/I concentric technology, when there is no TCH channel
on a common TRX but there are suitable TRX channels on the special
TRX, in addition to queuing. The parameter CiAssignInd decides
whether it can be done.
Note: whether the parameter is valid is decided by the bit related to
the concentric circle in the HoControl field of the R_HOC table.
Value range: False: Disabling assignment process from SDCCH to TCH
of special TRX; True: Enabling the assignment process from SDCCH to
TCH of special TRX
Default value: True
9. Uplink Best Signal Level (OptRxLevUL)
Description: The parameter indicates receiving intensity of best uplink
signal in the cell, that is, under receiving intensity. The signal quality
and low interference can be guaranteed. OptRxLevUl is mobile signal

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 93


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

level that BS expects to receive during the assignment or handover, if


optimization of transmission power in the uplink direction is performed.
Value range: See Table 74 for value range of uplink best signal level.

T ABLE 74 V ALUE RANGE OF UPLINK BEST SIGN AL LEVEL

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 to -109


62 -49 to -48
63 > -48

Note: Refer to descending threshold value controlled by uplink power.


Default value: 22
10. Downlink Best Signal Level(OptRxLevDL)
Description: The parameter indicates receiving intensity of the best
downlink signal in the cell, under the receiving intensity. Signal quality
and low interference can be guaranteed. OptRxLevDl is mobile signal
level that BS expects to receive during the assignment or handover, if
optimization of transmission power in downlink direction is performed.
Value range: See Table 75 for value range of downlink best signal level.

T ABLE 75 V ALUE RANGE OF DOWNLINK BEST SIGN AL LEVEL

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 to -109

62 -49 to -48
63 > -48

Note: Refer to descending threshold value controlled by downlink


power
Default value: 22
11. Candidate Cell Max Count (CandiateNum)
Description: A certain number of cells are necessary to supply in terms
of specifications, when BSC sends BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED
message to MSC. This parameter decides largest number of candidate
cells that can be contained in BSSAP HANDOVER REQUIRED
message.
Value range: 1 ~ 16

94 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Default value: 6
12. Up-Downlink Signal Balance (RxLevelBalance)
Description: The parameter indicates different values for uplink signal
level and downlink signal level in the area covered by cell. Calculation
method: RxLevBalance = Downlink signal Uplink signal. For example,
the value 5 db means that downlink signal is 5 db stronger than uplink
signal.
Value range: See Table 76 for value range of up-downlink signal
balance.

T ABLE 76 V ALUE RANGE OF UP-DOWNLINK S IGNAL B AL ANCE

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 0
1 1

19 19
20 20

Note: Refer to descending threshold value controlled by uplink power


Default value: 0
13. Allow UpLink Minimal Signal Level (CiAssignThs)
Description: It can directly assign MS to TCH channel on special TRX
from SDCCH to avoid call drop from occurring according to C/I
concentric technology and during the assignment from SDCCH to TCH
of TRX, when there is no TCH channel on common TRX and if there is a
proper TRX channel on the special TRX. The parameter "CiAssignThs
determines the level that must be exceeded by the signal level in
uplink direction (after correcting the power control).
Value range: See Table 77 for value range of allow uplink minimal
signal level.

T ABL E 77 V AL UE R AN G E OF AL L OW U PLI NK M INIM AL SIG N AL LE VE L

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 to -109

62 -49 to -48
63 > -48

Default value: 25

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 95


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

14. Minimal Resource Level (ResourceThs)


Description: To guarantee normal service a restriction is placed on
certain traffic (for example a better conversation quality can be
obtained only in case of 50% of traffic) in case of some special
frequency multiplexing modes. This parameter is a threshold value of
the traffic that a cell or its surrounding cells at the same layer can
reach. No channels will be allocated to assignment procedure in the cell
when TCH channel occupancy rate of a cell and its adjacent cell of the
same layer (quantity of TCHs occupied by a cell and its adjacent cells
of the same layer/total of TCHs occupied by a cell and its adjacent cells
of the same layer) reaches this value. Meanwhile, the handover will not
be affected by this parameter.
Value range: 0 ~ 100
Default value: 100
15. Access Minimal C/N Value (CnThresInd)
Description: A minimal acceptable C/N value can be specified when
distributing a channel to a call. It is to make channel selection. The
parameter CnThresInd determines minimal acceptable C/N value.
The principle of channel allocation is to select an idle channel that can
fulfills the value as best as possible. The parameter also affects the
optimization of the uplink mobile transmission power.
Value range: 0 ~ 63, representing 0 ~ 63 dB respectively
Default value: 15

System Parameters
1. Survey Period (InterfAvgPrd)
Description: BTS needs to measure interference on the unallocated
traffic channels, calculate the average of the recent interference values
periodically and convert it into corresponding interference band
information, and then transfer it to BSC in the RF RESOURCE
INDICATION message as a factor to be considered in channel
allocation of BSC. This is one of the BTS parameters.
Value range: See Table 78 for value range of survey period.

T ABLE 78 V ALUE RANGE OF SURVEY P ERIOD

Value Meaning
0 Reserved
1 One SACCH multi-frame is reported to BSC once

31 And 31 SACCH multi-frames are reported to BSC once

96 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Default value: 31
2. Interference Boundary (InterfBoundary)
Description: BTS needs to measure interference on unallocated traffic
channels, calculate the average of recent interference values
periodically and convert it into corresponding interference band
information, and transfer it to BSC in the RF RESOURCE INDICATION
message as a factor to be considered in channel allocation of BSC. The
interface boundaries are used to help convert the interference level
(average) value into corresponding interference band information.
Altogether six boundaries determine five interference bands. In fact, it
is unnecessary to set interference boundary 0 and interference
boundary 5. One represents infinity and the other represents negative
infinity. This parameter, describing the remaining four boundaries, is
one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Value range: See Table 79 for value range of interference boundaries.

T ABLE 79 V ALUE RANGE OF INTERFERENCE BOUNDARIES

Value of Interference Boundary n Level Value Represented


0 -110 dBm
1 -109 dBm

63 -47 dBm
Other values Reserved

Note: Usually from -85 dbm to -115 dbm is used for interference
boundaries 1 ~ 4.
Default value: Interference bands 0 ~ 5: 0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 63
3. Radio Link Failure (RLF) Judge Standard (ConFailCriterion)
Description: The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link
fails according to two standards: One based on the uplink SACCH error
rate and the other based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. This
parameter determines which method BTS uses as the standard to
judge connection failure. If SACCH error rate is used as the standard to
judge connection failure, BTS will use the same RadioLkTimeout
parameter value and the same process as MS does, thus avoiding
inconsistent judgment standards in the uplink and downlink directions.
Meanwhile, parameters RxLevThs and RxQualThs are invalid. If the
measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge
connection failure, BTS will use the two parameters RxLevThs and
RxQualThs.
Value range: 1: Based on uplink SACCH error rate (in order to ensure
the same judgment standard in the uplink and downlink directions); 2:
based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL.
Default value: 1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 97


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

4. Level Threshold of Survey RLF (RxLevThs)


Description: The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link
fails according to two standards: One based on uplink SACCH error
rate and the other based on measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL. The
radio link will be considered as failed when BTS detects that the uplink
receiving level is smaller than a certain threshold or the uplink
receiving quality is greater than a certain threshold, if the measured
value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as the standard to judge a connection
failure. Parameter RxLevThs specifies the threshold of the receiving
level. This parameter is invalid if uplink SACCH error rate is used as
the standard to judge connection failure (parameter ConFailCriterion is
1). RxLevThs is one of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Value range: See Table 80 for value range of level threshold of survey
RLF.

T ABLE 80 V ALUE RANGE OF LEVEL THRESHOLD OF SURVEY RLF

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 to -109

62 -49 to -48
63 > -48

Default value: 10
5. Quality Threshold of Survey RLF (RxQualThs)
Description: The network side (BTS) may judge whether the radio link
fails according to two standards of GSM specifications. One is based on
uplink SACCH error rate, and the other is based on measured value of
RXLEV/RXQUAL. The radio link will be considered as failed when BTS
detects that the uplink receiving level is smaller than a certain
threshold or the uplink receiving quality is greater than a certain
threshold if measured value of RXLEV/RXQUAL is used as a standard
to judge a connection failure. Parameter RxQualThs specifies reciving
threshold quality. This parameter is invalid if uplink SACCH error rate is
used as the standard to judge a connection failure. RxQualThs is one
of the configuration parameters of BTS.
Value range: See Table 81 for value range of quality threshold of
survey RLF.

98 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T ABLE 81 V ALUE RANGE OF QUALITY THRESHOLD OF SURVEY RLF

Value Corresponding BER Range


0 <0.2%
1 0.2% ~ 0.4%
2 0.4% ~ 0.8%
3 0.8% ~ 1.6%
4 1.6% ~ 3.2%
5 3.2% ~ 6.4%
6 6.4% ~ 12.8%
7 > 12.8%

Default value: 6
6. Survey RLF Period (RxLevQualPrd)
Description: The period of the network side to test radio link fault (in
units of SACCH multi-frame)
Value range: 1 ~ 255
Default value: 10
7. Send OverLoad Message Minimal Period (OverloadPrd)
Description: TRX will notify BSC according to GSM specifications by
sending OVERLOAD message periodically until overload disappears,
in case of CPU overload of TRX, or downlink CCCH channel overload, or
AGCH channel overload. The parameter OverloadPrd specifies period
for TRX to send OVERLOAD message, and it is one of the
configuration parameters of BTS (all TRXs under BTS use same
period).
Value range: 1 ~ 31 (in the unit of 102TDMA frame)
Default value: 10
8. PHY INFO Period during the Process of TCH Handover: T3105 0
Description: The message RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION" is sent
during an asynchronous handover of SDCCH channel in order to define
the re-sending interval. This timer is one of the configuration
parameters of BTS.
Timer start conditions: the timer T3105 0 starts when network
sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message.
Timer stop condition: the timer T3105 0 stops when the network
receives a layer-2 frame that can be correctly decoded or receives
the HANDOVER FAILURE message from the old channel.
Timeout action: when the timer T3105 0 expires, the RIL3_RR
PHYSICAL INFORMATION message is repeated.
Value range: See Table 82 for PHY INFO Period during SDCCH
Handover.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 99


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 82 P HY INFO PERIOD DURING SDCCH HANDOVER

T3105 [0] Time Represented


28 0.28 s
other values Reserved

Settings: cannot be changed


Default value: 28
9. PHY INFO Period during the Process of TCH Handover: T3105 1
Description: The timer T3105 1 is used to define the interval for
resending the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFOMATION" message during an
asynchronous handover of TCH channel. This timer is one of the
configuration parameters of BTS.
Timer start conditions: the timer T3105 1 starts when network
sends the RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message.
Timer stop condition: the timer T3105 1 stops when the network
receives a layer-2 frame that can be correctly decoded or receives
the HANDOVER FAILURE message from the old channel.
Timeout action: RIL3_RR PHYSICAL INFORMATION message is
repeated when the T3105 1 expires.
Value range: See Table 83 for PHY INFO Period during TCH Handover,

T ABLE 83 P HY INFO PERIOD DURING TCH HANDOVER

T3105 [1] Time Represented


10 0.1 s
other values Reserved

Settings: cannot be changed.


Default value: 10
10. BA Indication (or TS No. indication of BCCH)
Description: A timeslot where a common control channel BCCH is
located. One cell may have 4 BCCHs at most.
Default value: dynamic

100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Cell Optional Parameters


1. Time Interval (s) of MS Access Attempt after an Access Failure
(T3122,s)
Description: The network will send Immediately assign rejection
message to MS when receiving a channel request message from MS
and cannot allocate a suitable channel to MS. Immediately assign
rejection message contains timer parameter T3122 to prevent possible
wireless channel blocking caused by repeated channel requests sent by
the MS, that is, Waiting for Indication information unit. MS cannot
restart a new call until the time indicated by T3122 is passed if it
receives the Immediately assign rejection message. This parameter
is also one of the system control parameters, and is sent to MS in the
Immediately assign rejection message.
Value range: See Table 84 for value range of time interval(s) of MS
access attempt after an access failure

T AB L E 8 4 V AL U E R AN G E O F TI M E I N T E R V AL O F M S AC C E S S AT T E M P T AF T E R AN AC C E S S
F AILURE

Value Time Represented


0 0s
1 1s
... ...
255 255 s

Note: Generally, the time interval is suggested to be set ranging 10 s


~ 15 s; for the area with dense traffic, it is set in the range of 15 s~25
s.
Default value: 10 s
2. Adjacent Cell Num of Neighbor Band Reported by MS in MultiBand
(MulbandReport)
Description: MS in single-frequency GSM system needs only to report
contents of 6 adjacent cells with the strongest signals in a frequency
band when reporting to the network the survey result of adjacent cells.
The operator hopes that, in multi-band networking, MS can enter with
priority into a specific frequency band during handover, and that MS
reports the survey result according to not only the signal intensity but
also the frequency band of the signals, according to actual situation.
The MulbandReport parameter is to notify MS to report contents of
adjacent cells in multiple frequency bands. It is one of system control
parameters.
Value range: See Table85 for value range of adjacent cell num of
neighbor band reported in MultiBand.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 101


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABL E8 5 V AL U E R AN GE O F AD J AC EN T CEL L NU M O F NE I GHB OR B AN D R EP OR TE D I N


M ULTIBAND

Value Meaning
MS reports the survey results of six known and allowed adjacent cells with the
0 strongest NCC according to the signal intensity, regardless of which frequency
band adjacent cells are in
MS reports the survey result of one adjacent cell with the strongest signals in
the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent cell table. In the
1 remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still
more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of
which frequency bands they are in
MS reports the survey result of two adjacent cells with the strongest signals in
the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent cell table. In the
2 remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If still
more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells, regardless of
which frequency bands they are in
MS reports the survey result of three adjacent cells with the strongest signals
in the frequency bands (excluding that of local cell) in adjacent cell table. In
3 the remaining space, MS reports adjacent cell in local cell frequency band. If
still more space is available, MS reports the remaining adjacent cells,
regardless of which frequency bands they are in

Note: The setting of this parameter is subject to traffic in each


frequency band. General principles to be followed are:
Set this parameter as 0 if the traffic of each frequency band is
almost equivalent, and the operator has no choice over the
frequency band
Set this parameter as 3 if the traffic of each frequency band is quite
different, and the operator hopes that MS enters a specific
frequency band with priority
Set this parameter as 1 or 2 for other cases
Default value: 0
3. SMS Mode allowed in Cell Broadcasting (SmsBCUsed)
Description: Cell broadcasting short messages is also an optional
service of BSC according to specifications. Useful information may be
broadcasted to MS in the cell through the service, such as weather
forecasting and traffic. This parameter determines whether the service
of cell broadcasting short messages is available and whether to adopt
the Discontinuous Receiving (DRX) mode. However, the fact that BSC
can use the service of cell broadcasting short messages does not
guarantee that MS can receive short messages. CBCH channel must be
configured for the cell for this purpose. On one hand, DRX mode in cell
broadcasting short message service can save battery for the MS; on
the other hand, MS can choose to receive only the short messages that
it is interested in.
Value range: 0: not using the process of cell broadcasting short
messages; 1: using the process of cell broadcasting short messages,

102 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

but not adopting DRX mode; 2: using the process of cell broadcasting
short messages and also adopting the DRX mode.
Default value is 0
4. MS DTX Mode (broadcast on BCCH) (DtxUplinkBCCH)
Description: The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the
system does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the
subscriber conversation. This parameter controls how MS uses the DTX
mode. On one hand, the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3
message should be broadcasted to all MSs in the cell; on the other
hand, it may be necessary to notify MSs of older versions (of the first
stage) through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6 message
on SACCH. For MSs of newer versions, the RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE6 message contains DtxUplinkSacch. This
parameter is one of the network function parameters.
Value range: See Table 86 for value range of MS DTX mode (broadcast
on BCCH).

T ABLE 86 V ALUE RANGE OF M S DTX M ODE (BRO ADCAST ON BCCH)

Value Meaning
0 MS can use DTX
1 MS should use DTX
2 MS should not use DTX
3 Reserved

Note: Set this parameter as 1 (using DTX) if both the BTS equipment
and TRAU support the DTX mode. Otherwise, set it as 2 (not using
DTX)
Default value: 1
5. MS DTX Mode (broadcast on SACCH) (DtxUplinkBACCH)
Description: The Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode means that the
system does not transmit signals during the speech intermission of the
subscriber conversation. This parameter controls how MSs of newer
versions use the DTX mode, that is, notifying the MSs of newer
versions through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6
message on SACCH. Notify MSs of older versions (of the first stage)
through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE6 message on
SACCH, and the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message on
SACCH contains the DtxUplinkBcch parameter. This parameter is one
of the network function parameters.
Value range: See Table 87 for value range of MS DTX mode (broadcast
on SACCH).

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 103


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T A B L E 8 7 V A L U E R A N G E O F M S D T X M O D E ( B R O A D C A S T O N S AC C H )

Value TCH/F Channel TCH/H Channel


0 MS can use DTX MS should not use DTX
1 MS should use DTX MS should not use DTX
2 MS should not use DTX MS should not use DTX
3 MS should use DTX MS can use DTX
4 MS can use DTX MS can use DTX
5 MS should use DTX MS should use DTX
6 MS should not use DTX MS should use DTX
7 MS should use DTX MS should use DTX

Note: Set this parameter as 1 (using DTX) if both the BTS equipment
and TRAU support DTX mode. Otherwise, set it as 2 (not using DTX)
Default value: 1

Other Parameters
1. T200 Timer
Description: T200 (altogether 7 types) is the timer used on various
control channels in LapDm protocol of BTS.
Value range: This parameter is composed of 7 bytes, with each byte
standing for the value (with the unit of 5 ms) of a timer.
See Table 88 for values of T200 timer.

T ABLE 88 V ALUES OF T200 TIMER

Parameter Default Value


SDCCH 1 (5ms)
FACCH/Full rate 1 (5ms)
FACCH/Half rate 1 (5ms)
SACCH with TCH SAPI0 2 (10ms)
SACCH with SDCCH 2 (10ms)
SDCCH SAPI3 1 (5ms)
SACCH with TCH SAPI3 2 (10ms)

Default setting: See the above table for the default setting. Generally,
please do not change the values of these timers
2. Whether to Perform Handover Pretreating and Report Period
(Preprocess)

104 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Description: The survey report contains the greatest amount (message


amount) of Abis interface information. The pretreatment of the survey
report can be transferred to BTS to lighten the burden of Abis interface
link. BTS, after the pretreatment, averages the survey data of MS with
its own, and reports to BSC in a lower frequency. Average reporting
period can be two, three or four SACCH multi-frames (480ms), that is,
the frequency decreases from the original twice/s to once/2 s, so the
message amount of the Abis interface decreases. However, the
decreasing of message amount still depends on whether the message
length before pretreatment is the same as that after the pretreatment.
One disadvantage of pretreatment is that the handover control and
power control are not in time, which increases the possibility of
disconnection rate. This parameter determines whether to use
pretreatment and its period.
Value range: See Table 89 for value range of whether to perform
handover pretreatment and report period.

T ABLE 89 V ALUE RANGE OF W HETHER TO PERFORM HAN DOVER PRETREATMENT AND


REPORT PERIOD

Value Meaning
0 Not use pretreatment
2 Use pretreatment; the average reporting period is two SACCH multi-frames
3 Use pretreatment; the average reporting period is three SACCH multi-
frames
4 Use pretreatment; the average reporting period is four SACCH multi-
frames
Other values Reserved

Default value: 0
3. Common Control Channel (CCCH) Structure Parameter (Ccchconf)
Description: This is the configuration parameter of Common Control
Channel, that is, CCCH_CONF. CCCH in GSM system includes AGCH
and PCH, which are to send ALLOW ACCESS (that is, Immediately
assign) message and paging message respectively. All service channels
in every cell share same CCCH. CCCH may be functioned by one or
multiple physical channels, depending on the configuration of service
channels and traffic model of the cell. CCCH and SDCCH can share
same physical channel. The configuration parameter of CCCH,
CcchConf, determines the combining mode of CCCH in a cell. This
parameter tells two things: 1.BS_CC_CHANS (Number of CCCH);
2.BS_CCCH_SDCCH_COMB (Whether used together with SDCCH). This
parameter is broadcasted to all MSs in the cell through the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 message. CcchConf is also one of the
system control parameters.
Value range: See Table 90 for value range of structure parameter of
common control channel (CCCH).

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 105


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 90 V ALUE RANGE OF STRUCTURE P AR AMETER OF COMMON CONTROL CHANNEL


(CCCH)

Number of CCCH
CCCH-CONF Meaning Message Blocks in one
BCCH Multi-frame
One basic physical channel used by the CCCH,
0 9
not used together with the SDCCH
One basic physical channel used by the CCCH,
1 3
used together with the SDCCH
Two basic physical channels used by the
2 18
CCCH, not used together with the SDCCH
Three basic physical channels used by the
4 27
CCCH, not used together with the SDCCH
Four basic physical channels used by the
6 36
CCCH, not used together with the SDCCH
Others Reserved -

Default value: The setting of CcchConf parameter must be consistent


with actual configuration of the CCCH in the cell.
See Table 91 for value range of cell configuration.

T ABLE 91 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL CONFIGURATION

Number of TRX 1 2 3 4 5 6
CcchConf 1 0 0 0 0 2
TCH 7 14 22 29 37 44
SDCCH 4 8 8 16 16 16

4. Resource Location Information (LocName)


Description: Geographical location of the cell
5. Encryption Mode Supported by the Cell (Ciphermode)
Description: The encryption mode supported by BTS. The required
encryption algorithm is contained in BSSAP CIPHER MODE COMMAND
or BSSAP ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND
message sent by the MSC side. By checking this parameter, BSC can
learn whether the cell supports this required encryption algorithm to
give a proper response.
Value range: See Table 92 for value range of encryption mode
supported by the cell.

106 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T ABLE 92 V ALUE RANGE OF ENCRYPT M ODE SUPPORTED BY CELL

Value Meaning
1 Support/not support A5/1 algorithm
2 Support/not support A5/2 algorithm
3 Support/not support A5/3 algorithm
4 Support/not support A5/4 algorithm
5 Support/not support A5/5 algorithm
6 Support/not support A5/6 algorithm
Bit8=1/0 1/0: Support/not support A5/7 algorithm

Note: Set default value as 0, for no encryption is used in GSM in China


at present.
Default value: 0

GPRS Cell Reselection


Parameters
1. Cell Reselection Offset (ReselOffset,dB)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through adjacent cell item of PSI3 message. Cell reselection in GPRS
system follows C32 standard. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2
standard in GSM, contains a cell reselection offset parameter, ReselOff.
It is not necessary to present in the packet system message when the
offset represented by this parameter is 0 dB.
Value range: See Table 93 for value range of GPRS cell reselection
offset.

T ABLE 93 V ALUE RANGE OF GPRS CELL RESELECTION OFFSET

Value Relative Level Value Represented


0 -52 db
1 -48 db
... ...
22 +12 db
... ...
31 +48 db

Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 107


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

2. Temporary Offset of Cell Reselection (TemporaryOffset,dB)


Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message. Cell reselection in GPRS system follows
C32 standard. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in GSM,
contains a temporary offset parameter, TempOffset, which provides a
negative offset to C32 standard.
Value range: See Table 94 for value range of cell reselection temporary
offset.

T ABLE 94 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL RESELECTION TEMPORARY OFFSET

Value Related Level Value Represented(dB)


0 0
1 10
2 20
3 30
4 40
5 50
6 60
7 Infinite

Note: It is better to adopt the same offset as that in C2 standard of


GSM system
3. Penalty Time of Cell Reselection (PenaltyTime,10 s)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message. Cell reselection in GPRS system follows
the C32 standard. C32 standard calculation, similar to C2 standard in
GSM, contains a temporary offset, TempOffset, which provides a
negative offset. Its effective time depends on PenaltyTime parameter.
Value range: See Table 95 for value range of cell reselection penalty
time.

T ABLE 95 V ALUE RANGE OF CELL RESELECTION PEN ALTY TIME

Value Time Length Represented


0 10 s
1 20 s
... ...
31 320 s

Default value: 0

108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

4. Minimal Time interval of Cell Reselection


Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message. It is not allowed to reselect this cell
within T_RESEL period when MS performs a cell reselection and it is
abnormally released in a cell, unless there is no other cell for selection.
It is not necessary to broadcast this parameter to MS through PSI3
message when the time represented by this parameter is default value
(5 s).
Value range: See Table 96 for value range of minimal time interval of
cell reselection.

T ABLE 96 V ALUE RANGE OF M INIMAL TIME INTERVAL OF CELL RESELECTION

Value Time Represented


0 5s
1 10 s
2 15 s
3 20 s
4 30 s
5 60 s
6 120 s
7 300 s

Default value: 0 (time length represented is 5 s)


5. Signal Intensity Threshold Value of HCS (HCS_THR)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is an HCS parameter, and
is broadcasted to a MS through PSI3 message of local and
neighboring cells. It indicates the threshold value of HCS signal
intensity in the cell.
Value range: See Table 97 for Value range of signal intensity threshold
value of HCS.

T ABLE 97 V ALUE RANGE OF SIGN AL I NTENSITY THRESHOLD V ALUE OF HCS

Value HCS Signal Intensity Threshold Value Represented


0 -110 dbm
1 -108 dbm
... ...
63 -48 dbm

Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 109


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

6. HCS Priority (prioClass)


Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is also a HCS parameter,
and is broadcasted to a MS through PSI3 message. It specifies the
HCS priority of the cell.
Value range: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
7. Reselection Hysteresis on C31 Standard (C31_HYST)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message. It determines whether to use the
CellReselHys parameter on C31 standard.
Value range: 0: No; 1: Yes
Default value: 0
8. Reselection Hysteresis (ReselHysteresis)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message. MS needs to go through location updating
process after cell reselection in the case of GPRS cell reselection, if the
original cell and destination cell are in different locations. C32 values
obtained at the boundary for two adjacent cells are generally quite
different because of fading characteristic of radio channel. It causes MS
to select cell frequently. The interval between the two cell reselections
of MS will not be less than 15 s. However, 15 s is extremely short time
in terms of location updating. On one hand, it dramatically increases
signaling flow on the network and causes radio resources to be fully
utilized; on the other hand, it decreases call completion rate of the
system, for MS cannot respond to paging during location update. GSM
specification sets a specific parameter, Cell Reselecting Hysteresis
(CRH), to solve this problem. MS will activate the cell reselection
according to this parameter only when the signal level of adjacent cell
(whose location zone is different from that of local cell) is greater than
that of local cell, and meanwhile the value difference must be greater
than that required by the parameter.
Value range: See Table 98 for value range of GPRS cell reselection
Hysteresis.

T ABLE 98 V ALUE RANGE OF GPRS CELL RESELECTION HYSTERESIS

Value The Specified Hysteresis Level Value


0 0 dB
1 2 dB
2 4 dB
3 6 dB
4 8 dB
5 10 dB
6 12 dB
7 14 dB

110 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Default value: 4 or 5 (CRH is 8 db or 10 db). Make proper adjustments


in following cases:
Increase CRH value of different LAC adjacent cells in this cell when
the traffic of some cell is too heavy and the signaling flow is
frequently overloaded
Increase CRH value when the overlapping coverage range of
adjacent cells in different location zones is too large
Set CRH parameter as 1 ~ 3 (CRH level is between 2 db and 6 db)
if the coverage at adjoining area of adjacent cells of different LACs
is of poor quality, that is, when coverage gap appears, or adjacent
area is located in places with few slow moving objects, such as the
freeway
9. Route Area Reselection Hysteresis (RaReselHYS)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message. It specifies extra hysteresis value used in
selecting a cell in another routing area when MS is in STANDBY or
READY mode. It is not necessary to broadcast this parameter through
the PSI3 message when the value of this parameter is the same as
that of CellReselHys.
Value range: See Table 99 for value range of route area reselection
Hysteresis.

T AB L E 9 9 V AL U E R AN G E O F R O U T E AR E A R E S E L E C T I O N H YS T E R E S I S .

Value The Specified Hysteresis Level Value


0 0 dB
1 2 dB
2 4 dB
3 6 dB
4 8 dB
5 10 dB
6 12 dB
7 14 dB

Note: Set this parameter to 7


10. Reselection Offset Rules (R32_QUAL)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message. It determines whether to use the
exceptional rule when adopting ReselOff.
Value range: 0: Using positive ReselectOffset towards all adjacent cells;
1: Using positive ReselectOffset only towards those with the highest
receiving level value
Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 111


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

11. Minimal Receiving Level Allowed for MS Access (RxLevAsMin)


Description: Parameter used at MS side. This parameter is broadcasted
to a MS through PSI3 message of local cell and PSI3 and PSI3bis
messages of adjacent cells. This parameter indicates allowed minimum
receiving level of MS to access GPRS system. GSM system prescribes
that receiving level of MS must be higher than a threshold level, that
is, minimum receiving level allowed for MS access, when MS is
necessary to access the network, to prevent MS from accessing the
system in the case of low receiving signal level (communication
provided after such access is of bad and unsatisfying quality. Besides,
it is a waste of the radio resources of the network). In addition, this
prescription is also one of the standards for MS to select and reselect
cell (a parameter for C31 and C32 calculation).
Value range: See Table 100 for value range of minimal receiving level
allowed for MS access.

T AB L E 1 0 0 V AL U E R AN G E O F M I N I M AL R E C E I V I N G L E V E L AL L O W E D F O R M S AC C E S S

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
61 -50 ~ -49
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: The value is usually approximate to MSs receiving sensitivity.


RxLevAcMin may be properly increased to decrease C1 and C2 values
for some cells with overloaded traffic. Therefore, it reduces effective
coverage of the cell. However, the value of RxLevAcMin must not be
too large. Otherwise, a blind spot may be created at the cell
boundaries. It is better for the level value to exceed 90 dBm when
adopting this measure to balance the traffic. This parameter is usually
set as 10 (-101 dbm ~ -100 dbm) or lower at the preliminary stage of
the network running, higher than receiving sensitivity of MS, -102
dbm. However, this parameter can be increased by 2 (dB) when the
network capacity is expanded or the radio coverage is not a problem in
some areas. Therefore, it is better to set the default value of this
parameter to 12 (that is, -99 dbm ~ -98 dbm).
12. MS Maximum RxPwr before POC by Network (MsTxMaxCCH)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This parameter is broadcasted
to MS through PSI3 message of local cell and PSI3 and Psi3bis
messages of the neighboring cells. The transmitting power of MS is
controlled by the network when it communicates with BTS. The
network sets MS power through the power command, and MS must
use the transmitting power specified by the network as its output
power. MS outputs capable power closest to specified value if MS under

112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

its power level cannot output this power value. MsTxPwrMaxCCH


determines the power (used at random access) used before MS
receives network power control information when MS receives
messages on the PBCCH. This is also a parameter involved in C1 and
C2 calculation for MS to select and reselect a cell.
Value range: See Table 101 for value range of MS maximum TxPwr
before network POC.

T ABLE 101 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S M AXIMUM TXP WR BEFORE NETWORK POC

MS Output Power MS Output Power (dBm)


Value Value
(dBm) GSM900 GSM1800
0~2 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
5 33 0 30
... ... ... ...
17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
19~31 5 15~28 0

Note: MS near BTS interferes with neighboring channels if this


parameter is set to a large value; if it is too small, MS at cells edge
will have low possibility of successful access. The setting principle for
this parameter is: Decrease receiving level of a MS as much as
possible while guaranteeing a certain access success rate for MS at the
cell edge. Obviously, the larger cell coverage is, the higher output
power level of MS will be. This parameter is generally set to 5
(corresponding to GSM900MS) and 2 (corresponding to GSM1800MS).
In practical applications, after setting this parameter, access rate and
time of MS can be tested by dialing experimentally at cell edge under
different parameter settings to determine whether to increase or
decrease the value of this parameter.
13. Use HCS (HCS_EXIST)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of
Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS), and is broadcasted to a MS through
the PSI3 message. It indicates whether the HCS parameters
(PriorityClass and HCSTHr) exist in the cell. If local cell does not use
HCS parameters, the HCS parameters of other cells will also be
ignored. That is, all the cells use the infinite HCS signal intensity
threshold.
Value range: 0: Not using HCS parameters; 1: Using HCS parameters
Default value: 0
14. LSA Id (LSA_ID)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 113


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Description: This parameter is broadcasted to a MS through SI4,


SI6, SI7, and PSI3 messages and PSI3 and Psi3bis messages
of adjacent cells. It is to specify the LSA identifier of the cell.
Value range: 24bit
Default value: Determined by the network operator after the planning
15. Allow MS Attempting to Access Another Cell (RadASRetry)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI3 message, and it is used to indicate whether MS is
allowed to attempt to access another cell (if it exists). If abnormal
release occurs during the packet transmission, MS will discard all
running TBFs. If MS is allowed to access other cells (RadAcRetry = 1),
it should perform abnormal cell reselection, and establish TBF after
initializing new cell. If other suitable cells exist, MS cannot reselect the
original cell within T_RESEL seconds.
Value range: 0: No; 1: Yes
Default value: 0
16. Offset between the Cells with Same LSA Priority (LSA_OFFSET)
Description: This parameter is broadcasted to a MS through SI4,
SI6 and SI7 messages. It informs MS of the offset value to be used
in LSA reselection between two cells with the same LSA priority.
Value range: See Table 102 for value range of offset between cells with
same LSA priority.

T ABLE 102 V ALUE R ANGE OF OFFSET BETWEEN CELLS WITH S AME LS A P RIORITY

Value Offset
0 0 db
1 4 db
2 8 db
3 16 db
4 24 db
5 32 db
6 48 db
7 64 db

Default value: 0
17. MS Signal Intensity Threshold on High Priority Cell Reselection
(PRIO_THR)
Description: This parameter is broadcasted to a MS through the SI4,
SI6 and SI7 messages. It is related to the RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
parameter, and is used for the calculation of C4 standard.
Value range: See Table 103 for value range of MS signal intensity
threshold on high priority cell reselection.

114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T ABLE 103 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S SIGNAL I NTENSITY THRESHOLD ON HIGH PRIORITY


CELL RESELECTION

Value Offset
0 0 dB
1 6 dB
2 12 dB
3 18 dB
4 24 dB
5 30 dB
6 36 dB
7 Infinite

Default value: 1

GPRS NC Survey Parameters


1. Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet Idle Mode) (NcRepPerI,s)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of
network control survey. It is broadcasted to a MS through PSI5
message, and is to indicate the period of MS reporting cell reselection
survey in packet idle mode. It is not necessary to broadcast this
parameter through the PSI5 message when NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0.
Value range: See Table 104 for value range of cell reselection survey
report period.

T ABLE 104 V ALUE R ANGE OF CELL RESELECTION S URVEY REPORT PERIOD (P ACKET
IDLE MODE)

Value Meaning
0 0.48 s
1 0.96 s
2 1.92 s
3 3.84 s
4 7.68 s
5 15.36 s
6 30.72 s
7 61.44 s(default value)

Default value: 7
2. Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet Transmission Mode)
(NcRerPerI,s)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 115


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of


Network Control (NC) survey. It is broadcasted to a MS through the
PSI5 message, and is used to indicate the period of MS reporting the
cell reselection survey in the packet transmission mode. When
NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0, it is not necessary to broadcast this
parameter through the PSI5 message.
Value range: See Table 105 for value range of cell reflection survey
report period.

T ABLE 105 V ALUE R ANGE OF CELL RESELECTION S URVEY REPORT PERIOD (P ACKET
TRANSMISSION M ODE)

Value Meaning
0 0.48 s
1 0.96 s
2 1.92 s
3 3.84.44 s (default value)
4 7.68 s
5 15.36 s
6 30.72 s
7 61.44 s

Default value: 3
3. Ns Survey Report Command (MeaOrder)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This parameter is broadcasted
to a MS through PSI1 message, and is to indicate the survey report
command of MS in a cell.
Value range: See Table 106 for value range of NS survey report
command.

T ABLE 106 V ALUE R ANGE OF NS S URVEY REPORT COMMAND

Value Meaning
MS controls the cell reselection (= NC0) in the packet idle and packet
0 transmission modes; it is not necessary to send any survey report to the
network (= NC0 and EM0), and the PSI5 message shall not be broadcasted.
MS shall send to the network the survey report and/or the extended survey
1 report used for the cell reselection. Details about further cell selection and
survey are contained in the PSI5 message.

Default value: 0
4. Network Control Command (CtrlOrder)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of
network control survey. It is broadcasted to a MS through PSI5,
PSI13 and SI3 messages, and is to indicate the network control

116 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

command used in the cell. NC survey parameters (NcNoDrxPer,


NcRepPerI and NcRepPerT) can be ignored if this parameter equals to
NC0. Take default value if it equals to NC1 or NC2 and NC survey
parameters are ignored.
Value range: See Table 107 for value range of network control
command.

T ABLE 107 V ALUE R ANGE OF NETWORK CONTROL COMMAND

Value Meaning
0 NC0: MS controls the cell reselection; no survey report.
1 NC1: MS controls the cell reselection and sends the survey report.
2 NC2: The network controls the cell reselection and the MSsends the survey report.
3 Reserved and interpreted as NC0.

Default value: 0
5. Minimal Time in non-DRX Mode (NcNODrxPer,s)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of
network control survey. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI5
message, and is used to indicate the minimal time for MS to stay in the
non-DRX mode after sending an NC survey report. There is no need to
broadcast this parameter through PSI5 message when
NetworkCtrlOrder is NC0.
Value range: See Table 108 for value range of minimal time in non-
DRX mode.

T ABLE 108 V ALUE R ANGE OF M INIM AL TIME IN NON -DRX M ODE

Value Meaning
0 No non-DRX mode
1 0.24 s
2 0.48 s (default value)
3 0.72 s
4 0.96 s
5 1.20 s
6 1.44 s
7 1.92 s

Default value: 2
6. MS Extended Survey Level (ExtMeaOrder)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of
extended survey. It is broadcasted to a MS through PSI5 message,
and is to indicate whether MS performs extended survey and how to

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 117


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

interpret rest extended survey parameters (ExtRepType, NccPermited


and ExtRepPer).
Value range: See Table 109 for value range of MS extended survey
command.

T ABLE 109 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S EXTENDED SURVEY COMMAND

Value Meaning
0 EM0: MS performs no extended survey
1 EM1: MS must send the extended survey report to the network
2 Reserved
3 Reserved and interpreted as EM0

Default value: 0
7. MS Extended Survey Report Type (ExtRepType)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of
extended survey. It is broadcasted to a MS through PSI5 message,
and is to indicate the type of extended survey report sent by the MS.
The parameter is valid, and is sent through PSI5 message when
ExtMeaOrder is EM1.
Value range: See Table 110 for value range of MS extended survey
report type.

T ABLE 110 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S EXTENDED SURVEY REPORT TYPE

Value Meaning
Type I survey report: This type of report must be extended if the frequency
points for the extended survey are among the six strongest carrier
0 frequencies, no matter whether the BSIC decoding is successful. The report
should cover the receiving signal level and the successfully decoded BSIC
(if any)
Type II survey report: This type of report must be extended if all the
frequency points for the extended survey are located in the six strongest
1 carrier frequencies, the BSIC decoding is successful and the NCC part is
allowed for survey. The report should cover the receiving signal level and
the successfully decoded BSIC
Type-III survey report: Use this type of report to report all the frequency
points for the extended survey. No BSIC decoding is necessary. The report
2
should contain the receiving signal level. Besides, the interference of each
carrier frequency shall be reported
3 Reserved

Default value: 0
8. Extended Survey Report Interval Time (ExtRepPer,s)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of
extended survey. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI5
message, and is used to indicate the interval of the extended survey

118 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

report. The parameter is valid, and is sent through the PSI5 message
when ExtMeaOrder is EM1.
Value range: See Table 111 for value range of extended survey report
interval time.

T ABLE 111 V ALUE R ANGE OF EXTENDED SURVEY REPORT INTERVAL TIME

Value Meaning
0 60 s
1 120 s
2 240 s
3 480 s
4 960 s
5 1920 s
6 3840 s
7 7680 s

Default value: 0

GPRS Cell Options Prameters


1. T3168
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is a parameter of GPRS cell
option, and is broadcasted to a MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages. It indicates maxmium time a MS has to wait for the
PACKET UPLINK ASSIGNMENT message after it sends the PACKET
RESOURCE REQUEST message (or when the PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message contains Channel Request Description IE).
Value range: See Table 112 for value range of T3168.

T ABLE 112 V ALUE R ANGE OF T3168

Value Time Length Represented


0 0.0 s
1 0.5 s
... ...
7 3.5 s

Default value: 4 (2 s)
2. T3192
Description: Parameter used at MS side. During the packet downlink
transmission, if RLC data block to be transmitted is the final downlink
data block, the network will send an RLC data block with the Final

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 119


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Block Identifier (FBI) domain as 1 and containing an effective RRBP


field to initialize the release of the downlink TBF. For each received RLC
data block with FBI as 1 and containing an effective RRBP domain: 1)
In the acknowledged mode, MS should send the PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message with the FBI domain as 1 on the uplink block
specified by the RRBP domain; 2) In the unacknowledged mode, MS
should send the PACKET CONTROL ACK message on the uplink block
specified by the RRBP domain. Then, MS will start the T3192 timer.
When T3192 expires, the system will release resources; stop listening
to the PDCCH channel, and turns to listen to the paging channel. If a
MS receives the PACKET DOWNLINK ASSIGNMENT or PACKET
TIMESLOT RECONFIGURE message from the network within the
protection period of the T3192 timer, it will stop T3192 and transfer to
the packet transmission status.
Value range: See Table 113 for value range of T3192.

T ABLE 113 V ALUE R ANGE OF T3192

Value Time Length Represented


0 0.0 s
1 0.5 s
2 1.0 s
... ...
7 3.5 s

Default value: 1 (0.5 s). The time represented by T3192 timer must be
less than the protection time of T3193 timer of the downlink TBF at the
network side to ensure TFI uniqueness of MS at the same time.
3. N3102 Decrease Step (PanDec), N3102 Increase Step (PanInc), and
N3102 Max (PanMax)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. These are parameters of
GPRS cell option. They are broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1,
PSI13 and SI13 messages, indicateing the values PAN_DEC,
PAN_INC and PAN_MAX respectively. MS will set initial value of N3102
timer to the PanMax value after each cell reselection. 1) When MS
receives the PACKET UPLINK ACK/NACK message to move V(S)
forward, it adds PanInc to N3102 (but maxmium value shall not exceed
PanMax). 2) When MS detects a stalling condition (V(S) = V(A) + WS),
it will enable the T3182 timer. When it receives the PACKET UPLINK
ACK/NACK message that makes V(S) < V(A) + WS, it will stop the
T3182 timer. If the T3182 timer expires, MS will subtract PanDec from
N3102. When the condition of N31020 is satisfied, MS will take the
cell reselection as abnormal release.
Value range: See Table 114 for value range of N3102.

120 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T ABLE 114 V ALUE R ANGE OF N3102

Value Value Represented


0 4
1 8
2 12
... ...
7 32

Default value: PanDec = 0; PanInc = 1; PanMax = 7


4. Network Operation Mode (MNO)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is a parameter of GPRS cell
option. It is broadcasted to a MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages, and indicates network operation mode in the cell. There are
three modes:
Mode I: The network sends CS paging message to GPRS-attached
MS on the same channel as GPRS paging channel (the packet
paging channel or CCCH paging channel), or on GPRS service
channel (when a packet data channel is assigned to it). This means
that MS needs to monitor one paging channel only.
Mode II: The network sends CS paging message to GPRS-
attached MS on CCCH paging channel, which is also used for GPRS
paging. This means that MS needs to monitor CCCH paging channel
only. CS paging message is still sent on CCCH paging channel when
assigned a packet data channel.
Mode III: The network sends the paging message to GPRS-
attached MS on the CCCH paging channel, and sends GPRS paging
message either on packet paging channel (if any in the cell) or on
CCCH paging channel. This means that MS has to monitor two
paging channels (if there is a packet paging channel in the cell) to
receive CS or GPRS paging message.
Value range: See Table 115 for value range of network operation mode.

T ABLE 115 V ALUE R ANGE OF NETWORK OPERATION M ODE

Value Meaning
0 Network Operation Mode I
1 Network Operation Mode II
2 Network Operation Mode III
3 Reserved

Default value: Mode II. NMO for the cells of the same RAC must be the
same. If the Gs interface exists, the MSC can send the CS paging
message to the GPRS-attached MS through SGSN. In this case, only
Network Operation Mode I is available. If no Gs interface exists, the CS
paging message can only be sent through A interface to the GPRS-

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 121


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

attached MS. Two network operation modes are available in such


cases: 1) Network operation mode II, where BSS can work without the
PCCCH channel; 2) Network operation mode III.
5. Time Length after Entering Non-Drx Mode (DrxTimeMax)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is a parameter of GPRS cell
option. It is broadcasted to a MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages, and indicates the value of DRX_TIMER_MAX. When MS
changes from the packet transmission mode to the packet idle mode, it
should first enter the non-DRX mode. The time length for MS to stay in
the non-DRX mode is determined by minimum values of the
parameters NON_DRX_TIMER and DRX_TIMER_MAX.
Value range: See Table 116 for value range time length after entering
non-DRX mode.

T ABLE 116 V ALUE R ANGE OF TIME LENGTH AFTER ENTERING NON-DRX M ODE

Value Time Length Represented


0 0s
1 1s
2 2s
3 4s
... ...
7 64 s

Default value: 2
6. Max Blocks Allowed to be Transmitted in Each TS (BsCVMax)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is a parameter of GPRS cell
option. It is broadcasted to a MS through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13
messages, and indicates the value of BS_CV_MAX parameter of Max
Blocks Transmission in Each TS. This parameter determines the time
length of T3198 timer used by MS as sending party (= time
represented by BS_CV_MAX), the time length of T3200 used by MS in
non-DRX mode (= 4 x time represented by BS_CV_MAX), and the
value of N3104max (=3 x (BS_CV_MAX+3) x Number of timeslots
assigned in the uplink). All uplink data blocks sent by MS contain the
COUNT DOWN VALUE (CV) field. The network can use this field to
calculate the data blocks to be sent on current uplink TBF.
Value range: See Table 117 for value range of max blocks allowed to
be transmitted in each TS.

122 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T AB L E 1 1 7 V AL U E R AN G E O F M AX B L O C K S AL L O W E D T O B E TR AN S M I T T E D I N E AC H T S

Value Meaning
0 Time length of one block
1 Time length of one block
... ...
15 Time length of 15 blocks

Default value: 15
7. Package Control Acknowledgement Type Default Format (CtrlAckType)
Description: Parameter used on RLC/MAC layer of BRP and at MS side.
This is a parameter of GPRS cell option. It is broadcasted to a MS
through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages, and indicates default
format for MS to send PACKET CONTROL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
message.
Value range: See Table 118 for value range of package control
acknowledgement type default format.

T AB L E 1 1 8 V AL U E R AN G E O F P AC K AG E C O N T R O L AC K N O W L E D G E M E N T T Y P E D E F AU L T
FORM AT

Value Meaning
0 Default format is four access bursts
1 Default format is RLC/MAC block

Default value: 1
8. Access Burst Bit Type (AccessType)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of GPRS
cell option. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1, PSI13 and
SI13 messages, and indicates whether to use the 8-bit or 11-bit
access burst in the PRACH and PTCCH/U, and the PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGEMNT message. No essential difference exists between
these two types, except that 11-bit access burst can take a little more
content than the 8-bit access burst.
Value range: See Table 119 for value range of access burst bit type.

T AB L E 1 1 9 V AL U E R AN G E O F AC C E S S B U R S T B I T T Y P E

Value Meaning
0 Use 8-bit access burst
1 Use 11-bit access burst

Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 123


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

GPRS Other Parameters


1. Allow Sending SYS16, SYS17 on BCCH (AddReselPI2)
Description: According to the definition in the GSM specification, the
cell selection and reselection of MS are determined by the C1 and C2
parameters. Whether to use C2 as the cell reselection parameter is
determined by the network operator. AdditionReselPI (Additional
Reselect Param Ind, ACS) is used to notify MS whether to use C2
during the cell reselection. This parameter is broadcasted to MSs in the
cell through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4
messages. It is one of the cell selection parameters.
Value range: 0: If rest octets exist in the SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE4 message (SI4 Rest Octets), MS should obtain from the rest
octets the PI parameter related to the cell reselection and parameters
related to the C2 calculation; 1: MS should obtain the PI parameter
related to the cell reselection and parameters related to the C2
calculation from the rest octets of the SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE7
message
Default value: Generally, the system messages 7 and 8 are seldomly
used. AdditionReselPI must be set to 0. Otherwise, some MSs (for
example, NEC) will not be able to access the network.
2. Si3 Sending Position (Si3Locate)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This parameter is broadcasted
to a MS through the SI3, SI4, SI7 and SI8 messages and the
PSI3 message of adjacent cells. It indicates the scheduling position of
SI13 on BCCH. The system message 13 is only related to the GPRS
services. It can either be sent on the BCCH Norm position (In this
case, it occupies the BCCH block with TC = 4; TC = (FN DIV 51) mod
(8)), or on the BCCH Ext position (In this case, it occupies one fixed
AGCH block with TC = 0). SI13 is sent with low success rate on the
BCCH Ext position, because it has to compete with other messages
(such as, the Immediately assign message) for delivery opportunity.
In this case, the parameter value of Access Allowed Reserved Blocks
(BsAgBlkRes in the R_BTS table) must be set higher than 0. Otherwise,
SI13 will have no chance to be sent.
Value range: False: Sending on BCCH Norm; True: Sending on BCCH
Ext
Default value: False
3. Route Area Color Code (RaColor)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the SI3, SI4, SI7 and SI8 messages. Similar to the
BCC function in the GSM system, in some cases (for example, the
inter-BSC cell reselection), the GPRS network will assign different
RaColor values to adjacent cells with the same route area code to
ensure that MS can initiate the Routing Area Updating process. In
this way, when MS receives different RaColor values in the cells with
the same routing area code, it will initiate the Routing Area Updating
process, just like when it spans two different routing areas.
Value range: 0 ~ 7

124 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Default value: Uniformly planned by the operator


4. Priority Level of Package Access Allowed (PriAcThr)
Parameter used at MS side. It is broadcasted to a MS through the
PSI13 and SI13 messages. It indicates the priority level of MS
packet access allowed by the cell. Its function is similar as that of
ACCESS CLASS.
Value range: See Table 120 for value range of priority level of package
access allowed.

T AB L E 1 2 0 V AL U E R AN G E O F P R I O R I T Y L E V E L O F P AC K AG E AC C E S S AL L O W E D

Value Meaning
0 The cell does not allow package access
1 Not use; shall be interpreted as that the cell does not allow package access
2 Not use; shall be interpreted as that the cell does not allow package access
3 Allow the package access with priority as 1
4 Allow the package access with priorities as 1 ~ 2
5 Allow the package access with priorities as 1 ~ 3
6 Allow the package access with priorities as 1 ~ 4
7 The cell allows package access

Default value: 7
5. Idle Channel Number Threshold of CS Mode during the Convertion from
the PS+CS Channel to the PS Channel (CsChansThs)
Description: Parameter used by DBS on Pn. It indicates minimum
threshold of the number of idle channels under the CS status when the
network converts from the PS + CS channel to the PS channel. If the
number of idle CS channels is lower than the threshold, it is not
allowed to convert a dynamic PS + CS channel into a PS channel.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 2
6. Sending Rate (SendSpeed)
Description: Parameter used for global process on BRP. It indicates
whether various types of PSI messages is sent in high rate. There are
limited packet system messages (16) sent at high rate, and the
number of sent messages of each type varies depending on the length
of the message. Therefore, the user can only set rough requirements
for the sending rate of each type of system message. Before sending
the message, the global process will dynamically specify the sending
rate of each type of packet system message according to the user
requirement (analyze step by step according to the array subscripts 0
~ 5 of SendSpeed) and the system limitation. The corresponding
relationship between the array subscript and the packet system is
stated as follows: 0:PSI2, 1:PSI3, 2:PSI3BIS, 3:PSI4, 4:PSI5,
5:PSI13.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 125


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: See Table 121 for value range of sending rate.

T ABLE 121 V ALUE R ANGE OF SENDING R ATE

Value Meaning
0 Not sent at high rates
1 Allow to be sent at high rates

Default value: 1
7. SPLIT_PG_CYCLE Supported on CCCH (SpgcSupport)
Description: Parameter used at MS side and FUN side. It is broadcasted
to a MS through the PSI13 and SI13 messages, and indicates
whether to support the SplitPgCycle function on CCCH. SplitPgCycle
means to send the PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT, PACKET
PAGING and PACKET IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT messages
on multiple BLOCKs.
Value range: False: CCCH of the cell does not support
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE; True: CCCH of the cell supports SPLIT_PG_CYCLE.
Default value: False
8. PSI1 Message Repeat Period (Psi1RepIper)
Description: Parameter used at MS side and FUN side. It is broadcasted
to a MS through the PSI1 message, and the PSI13 and SI3
messages of local and adjacent cells. It indicates the sending period
and destination of the PSI1 message in a cell. PSI1 contains
information about cell reselection, PRACH control, control channel
description, and possible global power control parameters. As long as
the PBCCH exists, the message is always sent at high repetition rate.
Value range: See Table 122 for value range of PS11 message repeat
period.

T ABLE 122 V ALUE R ANGE OF PSI1 M ESS AGE REPEAT P ERIOD

Value Meaning
0 The PSI1 repeat period is 1 multiframe
1 The PSI1 repeat period is 2 multiframes
... ...
15 The PSI1 repeat period is 16 multiframes

Default value: 1
9. The Network Supports PACKET PSI STATUS Message (PsiStatInd)
Description: Parameter used at MS side and on BRP. It is broadcasted
to a MS through the PSI1 message, and indicates whether the
network supports PACKET PSI STATUS message. This function is
optional. When PsiStaInd equals 1, MS can send the PACKET PSI
STATUS message to the network and indicate the current value of the

126 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

PSI message stored on it. And then the network can set the required
PSI message for this MS on the PACCH to speed up the subsequent
flow of MS. Otherwise, MS can listen to the PSI message only at the
time points scheduled by the network.
Value range: See Table 123 for value range of network supporting
OACKET PSI STATUS message.

T A B L E 1 2 3 V A L U E R A N G E O F N E T W O R K S U P P O R T I N G P AC K E T P S I S T AT U S M E S S A G E

Value Meaning
0 The network does not support the PACKET PSI STATUS message
1 The network supports the PACKET PSI STATUS message

Default value: 0
10. PPCH Load Calculation Period (LoadPer)
Description: This parameter is used by BRP. It indicates the load
calculation period of PPCH.
Value range: 0 ~ 16
Default value: 10
11. PRACH OverLoad Report Period (OvLoadPer,s)
Description: PRACH OverLoad Report Period
Value range: 0 ~ 255 (s)
Default value: 10 s
12. Initial Value of Link Error Counter (RLTimeout)
Description: Initial value of the link error counter
Value range: 0 ~ 100
Default value: 20
13. Power Level Threshold of PRACH Overload (PrachBusyT,%)
Description: Threshold of overloaded PRACH power level
Value range: 0 ~ 100 (%)
Default value: 20
14. Whether the Cell Supports Extended Paging Mode (EpageMode)
Description: This parameter indicates whether the cell supports the
extended paging mode.
Value range: False: The cell supports extended paging mode; True:
The cell does not support extended paging mode
Default value: False

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 127


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

GPRS Channel Parameters


1. Blocks Distributed to PBCCH in Multiframes (PbcchBlks)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of PCCCH
structure. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message. It
indicates the number of blocks assigned as PBCCH in a 52 multiframes
(all together 12 blocks). PBCCH blocks are shared by the packet
system messages sent at high and low rates. A message sent at high
rate has higher priority. This parameter must be configured together
with the PSI1_REPEAT_PERIOD parameter in the PSI1 message to
ensure that block resources are available for the packet system
messages sent both at high and low rates.
Value range: See Table 124 for value range of blocks distributed to
PBCCH in Multiframes.

T ABLE 124 V ALUE R ANGE OF BLOCKS DISTRIBUTED TO P BCCH IN M ULTIFRAMES

Value Meaning
0 PBCCH occupies one block in the multiframe
1 PBCCH occupies two blocks in the multiframe
2 PBCCH occupies three blocks in the multiframe
3 PBCCH occupies four blocks in the multiframe

Default value: 0
2. Number of Blocks Allowed to be Kept in Access (PagBlkRes)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of PCCCH
organization. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message.
This parameter indicates the number of blocks in a 52-frame
multiframe that allow neither packet paging nor PBCCH. Only PAGCH,
PDTCH and PACCH can appear on these blocks. The uplink assignment
message will be sent with priority on these fixed blocks to speed up the
establishment of the uplink TBF. After sending the channel request on
the PRACH channel, MS will wait for the uplink assignment message on
all PCCCH channels of the same timeslot as the PRACH channel.
Value range: See Table 125 for value rang of blocks allowed to be kept
in access.

T AB L E 1 2 5 V AL U E R AN G E O F B L O C K S AL L O W E D TO B E K E P T I N AC C E S S

Value Meaning
0 The number of blocks reserved for PAGCH, PDTCH and PACCH is 0
1 The number of blocks reserved for PAGCH, PDTCH and PACCH is 1
... ...
12 The number of blocks reserved for PAGCH, PDTCH and PACCH is 12
13~15 Same as 0

128 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

Default value: 5
3. Fixed Blocks for PRACH on PCCCH (PRCHBLKS)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of PCCCH
organization. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message.
This parameter indicates the number of fixed blocks reserved for the
PRACH channel in the PDCH channel that bears PCCCH. These blocks
must be identified with USF = FREE. MS can use this parameter or USF
= FREE to carry out the PRACH assignment.
Value range: See Table 126 for value range of fixed blocks for PRACH
on PCCCH.

T A B L E 1 2 6 V A L U E R A N G E O F F I X E D B L O C K S F O R P R AC H O N P C C C H

Value Meaning
0 The number of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel is 0
1 The number of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel is 1
... ...
12 The number of fixed blocks reserved for the PRACH channel is 12
13~15 Same as 0

Default value: 2
4. Max Retransmission Times of Each Radio Priority Level (MaxReTrans)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of PRACH
control. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message. It
indicates maxmium attempts of random access allowed on PRACH for
MS with radio priorities of 1 ~ 4.
Value range: This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first
array element corresponds to maxmium attempt times allowed for
radio priority 1, and analyze the following like this.
See Table 127 for value range of max transmission times of each
priority level.

T ABLE 127 V ALUE R ANGE OF M AX RETRANSMISSION TIMES OF E ACH RADIO PRIORITY


LEVEL

Value Meaning
0 One attempt allowed
1 Two attempts allowed
2 Four attempts allowed
3 Seven attempts allowed

Default value: 2

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 129


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

5. Access and Connection Level of Different Radio Priority Levels


(PersistLev)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of PRACH
control. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message. The
network sets a level threshold P i (i=1, 2, 3, 4) for MS of various radio
priorities. For each attempt of packet access, MS will abstract a
random value R with even distribution probability from the set {0, 1,
..., 15}. MS is allowed to initiate an attempt of packet access only
when P i is lower than or equal to R.
Value range: This parameter is an array with 4 elements. The first
element corresponds to the access and persisting level of radio priority
1.
See Table 128 for value range of access and connection level of
different radio priority levels.

T AB L E 1 2 8 V AL U E R AN G E O F AC C E S S AN D C O N N E C T I O N L E V E L O F D I F F E R E N T R AD I O
PRIORITY LEVELS

Value Meaning
0 Persisting level 0
1 Persisting level 1
... ...
14 Persisting level 14
15 Persisting level 15

Default value: 0
6. Min TS Number of Adjacent Channel Requirement (S)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of PRACH
control. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message.
Whenever establishing a new connection, MS will send a channel
request message to the network through the PRACH channel. As
PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS access,
the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages
before it receives the packet assignment message. If MS does not get
any response for the previous channel request message, it can resend
a channel request message after waiting for a random period of time.
The TxInt parameter is just used to determine the time length of
random waiting.
Value range: See Table 129 for value range of min TS interval of
adjacent channel requirement.

130 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T AB L E 1 2 9 V AL U E R AN G E O F M I N TS I N T E R V AL O F AD J A C E N T C H AN N E L R E Q U I R E M E N T

Value Meaning
0 The number of the extended TS is 2
1 The number of the extended TS is 3
2 The number of the extended TS is 4
3 The number of the extended TS is 5
4 The number of the extended TS is 6
5 The number of the extended TS is 7
6 The number of the extended TS is 8
7 The number of the extended TS is 9
8 The number of the extended TS is 10
9 The number of the extended TS is 12
10 The number of the extended TS is 14
11 The number of the extended TS is 16
12 The number of the extended TS is 20
13 The number of the extended TS is 25
14 The number of the extended TS is 32
15 The number of the extended TS is 50

Value range: 2
7. TS Num of Trans. Random Access (TxInteger)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of PRACH
control. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message.
Whenever establishing a new connection, MS will send a channel
request message to the network through the PRACH channel. As
PRACH is an ALOHA channel, to improve the success rate of MS access,
the network allows MS to send multiple channel request messages
before it receives the packet assignment message. If MS does not
receive any response for the previous channel request message, it can
resend a channel request message after waiting for a random period of
time. The parameter S is used to determine the time length of random
waiting.
Value range: See Table 130 for value range of TS number of trans.
Random access.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 131


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T AB L E 1 3 0 V AL U E R AN G E O F TS N U M B E R O F T R AN S . R A N D O M AC C E S S

Value Meaning
0 S=12 s=12
1 S=15 s=15
2 S=20 s=20
3 S=30 s=30
4 S=41 s=41
5 S=55 s=55
6 S=76 s=76
7 S=109 s=109
8 S=163 s=163
9 S=217 s=217
10~15 Reserved

Default value: 2
8. Release PDCH Channel Immediately (PccRel)
Value range; True: Enabling to release PDCH channel immediately;
False: Disabling to release PDCH channel immediately
Default value: False
9. Related Access Class Mobile Phone Access Allowed (AccCtrlClass)
Description: Allow visiting MS access control class of MS:
ACC_CONTR_CALSS. All MS in GSM system have an access class (15
classes in all). MS with class 0 ~ 9 are common MS and with class 11
~ 15 are special MS (class 10 doesn't exist). The system can prohibit
some MS with some access class to enter the cell according to the
parameter. It allows access of a mobile console with access class = N if
N digit of access control class is 0, N=0, 1, 9, 11, 15. It allows
emergent calls when 11 digit = EC.
Value range: AccCtrlClass consists of two bytes (16 bits). It displays:
bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
st
1 byte C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8
2nd byte C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
It allows cell access when Cn is 0 which indicates that MS with access
class of n is not forbidden (n=0, 1, , 9, 11, , 15)
It forbids cell access when Cn is 1, which indicates that MS with access
class of n is forbidden (n=0,1,,9,11,,15)
C10 is always 0
Default value: 0 for C0 ~ C15 (excluding C10)

132 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

GPRS Power Control Parameters


1. MS Power Control Parameter Alpha
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of global
power control and GPRS power control. It is broadcasted to a MS
through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter
determines the parameter Alpha () of MS transmission power control.
Value range: See Table 131 for value range of MS power control
parameter alpha.

T AB L E 1 3 1 V AL U E R AN G E O F M S P O W E R C O N T R O L P AR AM E T E R AL P H A

Value Meaning
0 = 0.0
1 = 0.1
... ...
10 = 1.0
11~15 = 1.0

Default value: 0
2. Filter Period of Power: Packet Idle Mode (T_Avg_W)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of global
power control and GPRS power control. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter
indicates the filter period of the signal intensity for power control in the
packet idle mode.
Value range: See Table 132 for value range of filter of power in packet
idle mode.

T ABLE 132 V ALUE R ANGE OF FILTER P ERIOD OF POWER IN P ACKET IDLE M ODE

Value Meaning
0 The filter period is 2(0/2)/6 multiframes
1 The filter period is 2(1/2)/6 multiframes
... ...
25 The filter period is 2(25/2)/6 multiframes
26~31 The filter period is 2(25/2)/6 multiframes

Default value: 0
3. Filter Period of Power: Packet Transmission Mode (T_Avg_T)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of global
power control and GPRS power control. It is broadcasted to a MS
through the PSI1, PSI13 and SI3 messages. This parameter

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 133


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

indicates the filter period of signal intensity for power control in the
packet transmission mode.
Value range: See Table 133 for value range of filter period of power in
packet transmission mode.

T ABLE 133 V ALUE R ANGE OF FILTER P ERIOD OF POWER IN P ACKET TR ANSMISSION M ODE

Value Meaning
0 The filter period is 2(0/2)/6 multiframes
1 The filter period is 2(1/2)/6 multiframes
... ...
25 The filter period is 2(25/2)/6 multiframes
26~31 Reserved

Default value: 0
4. PBCCH Power Decrease according to BCCH (PB,-2dB)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of global
power control and a PBCCH descriptive parameter. It is broadcasted to
a MS through the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This
parameter indicates the decreasing value (compared with the output
power of BCCH) of the power used on the PBCCH block.
Value range: See Table 134 for value range of PBCCH power decrease
according to BCCH.

T AB L E 1 3 4 V AL U E R AN G E O F P B C C H P O W E R D E C R E AS E AC C O R D I N G T O B C C H

Value Meaning
0 Pb = 0dB
1 Pb = -2dB
... ...
15 Pb = -30dB

Default value: Pb must be 0 when PBCCH is on BCCH carrier frequency.


5. Survey Position (PcMeasChan)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of global
power control and GPRS power control. It is broadcasted to a MS
through PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. It indicates where
downlink power strength is to be surveyed for uplink power control.
Value range: See Table 135 for value range of survey position.

134 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

T ABLE 135 V ALUE R ANGE OF SURVEY P OSITION

Value Meaning
0 Downlink survey shall be carried out on BCCH for the purpose of power
control
1 Downlink survey shall be carried out on PDCH for the purpose of power
control

Default value: 0
6. Sending PSI4 (Psi4 send)
Description: Parameter used at MS side, that is
INT_MEAS_CHANNEL_LIST_AVAIL. This is a parameter of global power
control. It is broadcasted to a MS through the PSI1 message. This
parameter indicates whether to broadcast the optional PSI4
message. This message contains a list of channels that will interfere
with the survey.
Value range: 0: Not broadcasting PSI4 message; 1: Broadcasting PSI4
message
Default value: 0
7. Filter Const of Interference Signal Power (N_Avg_I)
Description: Parameter used at MS side. This is a parameter of global
power control and GPRS power control. It is broadcasted to MS through
the PSI1, PSI13 and SI13 messages. This parameter is a filter
constant used for interference signal intensity in power control.
Value range: See Table 136 for value range of filter const of
interference signal power.

T ABLE 136 V ALUE R ANGE OF FILTER CONST OF I NTERFERENCE SIGNAL POWER

Value Meaning
0 Filter constant 2(0/2)
1 Filter constant 2(1/2)
... ...
15 Filter constant 2(15/2)

Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 135


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Dynamic HR Parameters
1. Whether to initiate related parameters of local cell to support dynamic
HR (UserCellDynHRPara)
Value range: True: Enabling related parameters of local cell to support
dynamic HR; False: Disabling related parameters of local cell to
support dynamic HR
Default value: False
2. Threshold of single TRX Cell to hand over from full rate to half rate
(SinTrxFRToHRThs)
Description: Threshold value of single TRX cell to hand over from full
rate to half rate = TCH channels occupied in cell/all available TCH
channels in the cell (including IDLE and BUSY). TCH channels contain
TCH/F and TCH/H. It is necessary to perform the handover of TCH/F
TCH/H, for the traffic is busy in the cell that upper limit corresponds to.
Cells fall into two types during the handover from full rate to half rate:
Configure only one TRX in the cell
Configure two or more TRX in the cell
TCH channels are less if only one TRX is configured in the cell and it is
necessary to configure BCCH and SDCCH channels. Therefore, there
are 6 TCH channels in a single TRX cell. There must be difference
between the threshold of single TRX cell and of multiple TRXs, to
reflect actual situation better.
Threshold falls into RMM module threshold and cell threshold,
according to convenience of controlling the cell and difference of the
cell. RMM module threshold is default. It is valid to all cells configured
with dynamic handover channel under this module. Set threshold for
this cell in cell Level 1 setting if it needs special controlling threshold.
Threshold RMM module settings is invalid to this cell in this case.
Value range: 60 ~ 85 (Unit: )
Default value: 65
3. Threshold value of multiple TRX cells to hand over from full rate to half
rate (MULTRXFRTOHRTHS)
Description: Same as Threshold value of single TRX cell to hand over
from full rate to half rate (SINTRXFRTOHRTHS)
Value range: 60 ~ 85 (Unit: %)
Default value: 75
4. Threshold value to hand over from full rate to half rate (HRTOFRTHS)
Description: Threshold value to hand over from full rate to half rate =
TCH channels occupied in the cell/all available TCH channels in the cell
(including IDLE and BUSY). Note: TCH channels include TCH/F and
TCH/H. It is necessary to perform handover of TCH/H TCH/F, for the
traffic is rather idle in the cell that lower limit corresponds to.
Threshold falls into RMM module threshold and cell threshold,
according to convenience of controlling the cell and difference of the

136 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 3 - Cell Parameters

cell. RMM module threshold is default. It is valid to all cells configured


with dynamic handover channel under this module. Set threshold for
this cell in cell Level 1 setting if it needs special controlling threshold.
Threshold RMM module settings is invalid to this cell in this case.
Value range: 30 ~ 60 (Unit: )
Default value: 50
5. Protection time to hand over from full rate to half rate
(FRToHRKeepTime)
Description: Occupation of the channel is random, and it may result in
frequent adjustment of channels. Set timer protection after one
handover to avoid the frequency. It does not perform the handover
during the protection time even if it meets the requirements of
handover. Differ handover of TCH/F TCH/H and TCH/H TCH/F.
Dynamic HR is to guarantee the cell to provide as many voice channels
as possible during the high-traffic, so handover protection time of
TCH/F TCH/H is shorter and that of TCH/H TCH/F is longer.
Default value:
Protection time to hand over TCH/F to TCH/H: 5 mins
Protection time to hand over TCH/H to TCH/F: 30 mins
Note: This parameter falls into RMM module class and cell class. It can
be adjusted flexibly to guarantee the convenience of setting.
Value range: 3 ~ 30 (Unit: Min)
Default value: 5
6. Protection time to hand over from half rate to full rate
(HRToFRKeepTime)
Description: Same as that to hand over from full rate to half rate
(FRToHRKeepTime)
Value range: 15 ~ 60 (Unit: Min)
Default value: 30
7. Dynamic HR handover, TCH/F channel reserved rate (TCHReserveRate)
Value rage: 0 ~ 60 (Unit: %)
Default value: 40

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 137


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

This page is intentionally blank.

138 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4

Cell Object Parameters

In this chapter, you will learn about:


TRX Parameters
Interference Parameters
CA Frequency Parameters
Power Control Parameters
Handover Control Parameters
Adjacent Cell handover and Reselection Parameters
Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters
Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters
Frequency Hopping System Parameters
Channel Parameters
3G Cell Control Parameters
3G Handover Control Parameters
3G Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters
3G Handover Cell Parameters
3G Handover and Reselection Parameters

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 139


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

TRX Parameters
1. Transceiver No. (TRXID)
Description: The number of the current TRX
2. TRX Type (TrxType)
Description: The type of the TRX; usually use the concentric circle type
Value range: See Table 137 for value range of TRX types.

T ABLE 137 TRX TYPES

TrxType Type
0 Common type (outer circle)
1 Special type (inner circle)

Default value: 0
3. Correlation TelecomLapdLink DN
Description: DN of Lapdlink used by the base band TRX. It is an
internal parameter of OMCR (V2)
4. Correlation Radio Carrier No.
Description: The radio carrier number corresponding to this base band
TRX
5. Assign Priority of the Trx (TrxPriority)
Description: The priority assignment of the carrier frequency of the
same type
6. Correlation BTts Board
Description: DN of related devices in this BSS system, SiteID-Rack-
Shelf-Panel

Interference Cell Parameters


1. Interference Cell No. (ICID)
Description: Number of the current interference cell
2. Related Cell DN
Description: DN of the external cell of this BSS: EcId

140 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

CA Frequency parameters
1. Carrier No. (RCID)
Description: Identifying number of the carrier
2. TxPwrMax (PowerClass)
Description: Power level of the corresponding carrier frequency
Value range: 1 ~ 8
Default value: 3
3. TxPwrMax Modulate Value (PwrReduction)
Description: Static power level of the TRX in the cell; used to modulate
the transmission power of the carrier frequency
Value range: 0 ~ 6
Default value: 0
4. Absolute Radio Carrier (ArfcnList)
Cell frequency list
Description: List of absolute RF channel number of various frequencies
used by the cell. This parameter is broadcasted in some form to MS in
the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE1 message. MS
uses this broadcasted parameter to decode Mobile Allocation (MA)
table used for frequency hopping. It is better not to support the two
frequency bands in one cell, GSM900 and GSM1800, at present.
Value range: This parameter can be considered as a data array. Each
element is 16-bit and stands for a frequency, with Value ranging from
0 ~ 1023. Arrange the elements in this sequence: If it is a cell with
GSM900, arrange the frequencies within the ranges of 1 ~ 124 and
975 ~ 1023 in the ascending order; if the frequency 0 exists, arrange
it as the last; if it is a cell with GSM1800, arrange the frequencies in
the ascending order. The previous parameter CaFreqNum (number of
cell frequencies) determines the number of valid elements (counted
from the beginning) in the array.
BA frequency band list
Description: List of absolute RF channel number of BCCH carrier
monitored by idle MS. This parameter is broadcasted in some form to
MS in the cell through RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE2, 2bis
or 2ter message.
Value range: This parameter can be considered as a data array. Each
element is 16-bit and stands for a frequency, ranging from 0 ~ 1023.
Arrange elements in this sequence: 1) Arrange frequencies within 1 ~
124 at the very front in ascending order; 2) Arrange frequencies within
975 ~ 1023, if any, in ascending order after 1); if frequency 0 exists,
arrange it after 975 ~ 1023; 3) Arrange frequencies within 512 ~ 885,
if any, in ascending order after 2). Previous parameter BaFreqNum
(number of BA frequencies) determines the number of the valid
elements (counted from the beginning) in the array.
Note: This parameter must contain ARFCN of BCCH of local cell.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 141


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Power Control Parameters


Power Survey Parameters
1. Sample Count of Uplink Level (PcULLevWindow)
Description: BSC makes power control decisions in GSM system
according to the measurement data. BSC uses a series of average
values instead of original values form the measurement data when
making power control decisions, to avoid the effect of burst
measurement value caused by complicated radio transmission and to
reduce the effect of burst measurement value. PcUlLevWindow (power
control uplink level average window) is the size of the window used to
calculate the average value of the uplink signal intensity, that is, the
number of samples used in calculating the average.
Value range: 1 ~ 32
Default value: 6
2. Reserve Count of Uplink Level (PcULLevWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals in the voice intermittent period during the subscriber
conversation. Two types of measurement data will be reported to BSC
when using DTX mode. One is average value of the measurement
results of all timeslots in a measurement period in non-DTX mode, and
the other is average value of the measurement results of some specific
timeslots in a measurement period in DTX mode. Therefore, BSC needs
to select one type of measurement data according to the actual
situation for calculating the average value. The first type of
measurement data is more accurate, because it is the average value of
the measurement results of all timeslots. While the second type of
measurement data is not that accurate, because it is the average value
of the measurement results of some timeslots. Therefore, BSC needs
to use different weights for the two types of measurement data when
averaging the measurement values, The parameter PcUlLevWeight
determines the weight for the first type of measurement data (of all
timeslots) when averaging downlink signal intensity for power control.
The weight for the second type of measurement data (of some
timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 2
3. Sample Count of Downlink Level (PcDLLevWindow)
Description: BSC makes power control decisions according to the
measurement data in GSM system. BSC uses a series of average
values instead of original values of measurement data when making
power control decisions, to avoid the effect of burst measurement
values caused by complicated radio transmission and to reduce the
effect of burst measurement values. The parameter PcDlLevWindow
(power control downlink intensity average window) is the size of the
window used to calculate the average value of downlink signal

142 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

intensity, that is, the number of samples used in calculating the


average value.
Value range: 1 ~ 32
Default value: 6
4. Reserve Count of Downlink Level (PcDLLevWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. When using the DTX mode, two types of measurement
data will be reported to BSC. One is the average value of the
measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in
the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the
measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement
period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of measurement
data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value.
The first type of measurement data is more accurate, because it is the
average value of the measurement results of all timeslots. However,
the second type is not that accurate, because it is the average value of
the measurement results of some timeslots. Therefore, BSC needs to
use different weights for these two types of measurement data when
averaging the measurement values. The parameter PcDlLevWeight
determines the weight for the first type of measurement data (of all
timeslots) when averaging the downlink signal intensity for power
control. The weight for the second type of measurement data (for
some timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 2
5. Sample Count of Uplink Quality (PcULQualWindow)
Description: BSC makes power control decisions in GSM system
according to measurement data. BSC uses a series of average values
instead of original values of the measurement data when making
power control decisions, to avoid effect of burst measurement values
caused by complicated radio transmission and to reduce effect of burst
measurement values. The parameter PcUlQualWindow (power control
uplink quality average window) is the size of the window used to
calculate the average value of uplink signal quality, that is, number of
samples used in calculating the average.
Value range: 1 ~ 32
Default value: 6
6. Reserve Count of Uplink Quality (PcULQualWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to the
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. When using the DTX mode, two types of measurement
data will be reported to BSC. One is the average value of the
measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in
the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the
measurement results of some specific timeslots within a measurement
period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of measurement

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 143


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value.
The first type of measurement data is more accurate, because it is the
average value of the measurement results of all timeslots. While the
second type of measurement data is not that accurate, because it is
the average value of the measurement results of some timeslots.
Therefore, BSC needs to use different weights for the two types of
measurement data when averaging the measurement values, The
parameter PcUlQualWeight determines the weight for the first type of
measurement data (of all timeslots) when averaging the uplink signal
quality for power control. The weight for the second type of
measurement data (of some timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 2
7. Sample Count of Downlink Quality (PcDLQualWindow)
Description: BSC makes power control decisions in GSM system
according to the measurement data. BSC uses a series of average
values instead of the original values of the measurement data when
making power control decisions, to avoid the effect of burst
measurement value caused by complicated radio transmission and to
reduce the effect of burst measurement value. The parameter
PcDlQualWindow (power control downlink quality average window) is
the size of the window used to calculate average value of downlink
signal quality, the number of samples used in calculating the average
Value range: 1 ~ 32
Default value: 6
8. Reserve Count of Downlink Quality (PcDLQualWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to the
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. Two types of measurement data will be reported to BSC
when using DTX mode. One is the average value of the measurement
results of all timeslots within a given measurement period in the non-
DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the measurement
results of some specific timeslots within a given measurement period in
the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of measurement data
according to the actual situation for calculating the average value. The
first type of measurement data is more accurate, because it is the
average value of the measurement results of all timeslots. The second
type is not that accurate, because it is the average of the
measurement results of some timeslots. Therefore, BSC needs to use
different weights for these two types of measurement data when
averaging the measurement values, The parameter PcDlQualWeight
determines the weight for the first type of measurement data (of all
timeslots) when averaging downlink signal quality for power control.
The weight for the second type of measurement data (of some
timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 2
9. Performance Survey Report Period (PwrCtrlReportPrd,51 multiframes)

144 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Description: Period of performance survey report for power control (51


multiframes)
Default value: 10

Power Adjust Threshold Parameters


1. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Level
(PcULIncLev)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. The uplink receiving strength is
one of the reasons for power increase in the uplink MS. Make the
power increase decision according to: When P of the closest N average
values of the uplink signal intensity (P and N stand for the number of
the average values) are lower than related threshold, the transmission
power of the uplink MS must be increased to enhance the uplink signal
intensity. The parameter PcUlInclLevThs defines related threshold, the
parameter PcUlInclLevN defines related N value, and the parameter
PcUlInclLevP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcUlInclLevPPcUlInclLevN31.
See Table 138 for value range of Pwr INC due to uplink level.

T ABLE 138 THRESHOLD V AL UE RANGE OF P WR. I NC DUE TO UPLINK LEVEL

Threshold Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
... ...
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Default values: threshold = 18, P = 3, N = 4


2. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. INC due to Downlink Level
(PcDLIncLev)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. The downlink receiving strength
is one of the reasons for power increase in the downlink BTS. Make the
power increase decision according to: When P of the closest N average
values of the downlink signal intensity (P and N stand for the number
of the average values) are lower than related threshold, the
transmission power of the downlink BTS must be increased to enhance
the downlink signal intensity. The parameter PcDlInclLevThs defines
related threshold value, the parameter PcDlInclLevN defines related N
value, and the parameter PcDlInclLevP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcDlInclLevPPcDlInclLevN31.
See Table 139 for value range of Pwr INC due to downlink level.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 145


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 139 THRESHOLD V AL UE RANGE OF P WR. I NC DUE TO DOWNLINK LEVEL

Threshold Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
... ...
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Default values: threshold = 18, P = 3, N = 4


3. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Uplink Level
(PcULRedLev)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. The uplink receiving strength is
one of the reasons for power decrease in the uplink MS. Make the
power decrease decision according to: When P of the closest N average
values of the uplink signal intensity (P and N stand for the number of
the average values) are higher than related threshold, the transmission
power of the uplink MS must be decreased to weaken the uplink signal
intensity. The parameter PcUlRedLevThs defines related threshold
value, the parameter PcUlRedLevN defines related N value, and the
parameter PcUlRedLevP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcUlRedLevPPcUlRedLevN31.
See Table 140 for value range of Pwr DEC due to uplink level.

T ABLE 140 THRESHOLD V AL UE RANGE OF P WR. DEC DUE TO UPLINK L EVEL

Threshold Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
61 -50 ~ -49
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Default values: threshold = 22, P = 3, N = 4


4. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Level
(PcDLRedLev)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. The downlink receiving strength
is one of the reasons for power decrease in the downlink BTS. Make
the power decrease decision according to: When P of the closest N
average values of the downlink signal intensity (P and N stand for the
number of the average values) are higher than related threshold, the

146 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

transmission power of the downlink BTS must be decreased to weaken


the downlink signal intensity. The parameter PcDlRedLevThs defines
related threshold value, the parameter PcDlRedLevN defines related N
value, and the parameter PcDlRedLevP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcDlRedLevPPcDlRedLevN31.
See Table 141 for value range of Pwr DEC due to downlink level.

T ABLE 141 THRESHOLD V AL UE RANGE OF P WR. DEC DUE TO DOWNLINK L EVEL

Threshold Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Default values: threshold = 22, P = 3, N = 4


5. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Quality
(PcULIncQual)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. The uplink receiving quality is
one of the reasons for power increase in the uplink MS. Make the
power increase decision according to: When P of the closest N average
values of the uplink signal quality (P and N stand for the number of the
average values) are higher than related threshold, the transmission
power of the uplink MS must be increased to improve the uplink signal
quality. The parameter PcUlInclQualThs defines related threshold
value, the parameter PcUlInclQualN defines related N value, and the
parameter PcUlInclQualP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcUlInclQualPPcUlInclQualN31.
See Table 142 for value range of Pwr INC due to uplink quality.

T ABLE 142 THRESHOLD V ALUE RANGE OF P WR. I NC DUE TO UPLINK QU ALITY

Threshold Corresponding Quality Level Meaning


0 0 BER< 0.2%
1 1 0.2%<BER< 0.4%
... ... ...
6 6 6.4%<BER<12.8%
7 7 12.8%<BER

Default values: threshold = 3, P = 3, N = 4

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 147


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

6. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Quality


(PcDLIncQual)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. The downlink receiving quality is
one of the reasons for power increase in the downlink BTS. Make the
power increase decision according to: When P of the closest N average
values of the downlink signal quality (P and N stand for the number of
the average values) are higher than related threshold, the transmission
power of the downlink BTS must be increased to improve the downlink
signal quality. The parameter PcDlInclQualThs defines related threshold
value, the parameter PcDlInclQualN defines related N value, and the
parameter PcDlInclQualP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcDlInclQualPPcDlInclQualN31.
See Table 143 for value range of Pwr DEC due to downlink quality.

T ABLE 143 THRESHOLD V AL UE RANGE OF P WR. DEC DUE TO DOWNLINK QUALITY

Threshold Corresponding Quality Level Meaning


0 0 BER<0.2%
1 1 0.2%<BER<0.4%
2 2 0.4%<BER<0.8%
... ... ...
7 7 12.8%<BER

Default values: threshold = 3, P = 3, N = 4


7. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Uplink Quality
(PcULRedQual)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. Uplink receiving quality is one of
reasons for power decrease in uplink MS. Make power decrease
decision according to: When P of closest N average values of uplink
signal quality (P and N stand for number of average values) are lower
than related threshold, transmission power of uplink MS must be
decreased to weaken uplink signal quality. The parameter
PcUlRedQualThs defines related threshold value, the parameter
PcUlRedQualN defines related N value, and the parameter
PcUlRedQualP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcUlRedQualPPcUlRedQualN31.
See Table 144 for value range of Pwr DEC due to uplink quality.

148 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

T ABLE 144 THRESHOLD V AL UE RANGE OF P WR. DEC DUE TO UPLINK QUALITY

Threshold Corresponding Quality Level Meaning


0 0 BER<0.2%
1 1 0.2%<BER<0.4%
2 2 0.4%<BER<0.8%
... ... ...
6 6 6.4%<BER< 12.8%
7 7 12.8%<BER

Default values: threshold = 3, P = 3, N = 4


8. Threshold, Value P and Value N of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Quality
(PcDLRedQual)
Description: Power control decisions, according to GSM specifications,
depend on a series of average values. The downlink receiving quality is
one of the reasons for power decrease in the downlink BTS. Make the
power decrease decision according to: When P of the closest N average
values of the downlink signal quality (P and N stand for the number of
the average values) are lower than related threshold, the transmission
power of the downlink BTS must be decreased to weaken the downlink
signal quality. The parameter PcDlRedQualThs defines related
threshold value, the parameter PcDlRedQualN defines related N value,
and the parameter PcDlRedQualP defines related P value.
Value range: 1PcDlRedQualPPcDlRedQualN31.
See Table 145 for value range of Pwr DEC due to downlink quality.

T ABLE 145 THRESHOLD V AL UE RANGE OF P WR. DEC DUE TO DOWNLINK QUALITY

Threshold Corresponding Quality Level Meaning


0 0 BER<0.2%
1 1 0.2%<BER<0.4%
2 2 0.4%<BER<0.8%
... ... ...
6 6 6.4%<BER<12.8%
7 7 12.8%<BER

Default values: threshold = 3, P = 3, N = 4

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 149


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Power Control Parameters


1. Power Control Object No. (PcID)
Description: Number of the power control object
2. Allow Rapid Power Control (RapidPcInd)
Description: Whether to allow the use of rapid power control process.
The rapid power control process is an optional item of BSC. On one
hand, it can decrease the interference of the whole system; on the
other hand, it can meet the need of dynamic power control of the
rapidly moving MS. Each amplitude of power control used by the rapid
power control process is not a fixed value, but an integer multiple of
the power control step (increase and decrease) of the cell parameter.
The parameter RapidPc determines the availability of the rapid power
control process.
Value range: False: Not using the rapid power control process; True:
Using the rapid power control process
Default value: False
3. Maximum Value of Power DEC (PwrDecrLimit)
Description: The system will set specific power decrease maximum
limit corresponding to each quality level to prevent MS from
disconnecting because of the rapid power decrease when carrying out
the rapid power control for quality reasons. For example, the
parameter PwrDecrLimit 0 determines maximum power decrease limit
for (BER<0.2%) calls with quality level 0. This parameter works for
both uplink and downlink.
Value range: This parameter can be taken as an array of size eight,
each of which is one byte. The parameter PwrDecrLimit n determines
maxmium power decrease available for calls with quality level as n.
Value range of the elements is 0 ~ 38, standing for 0 ~ 38 dB
Note: Default value can be set as 38. Set corresponding limits for
power decrease according to performance statistics parameters, if the
power decrease causes too many disconnections.
Default value: 38

Other Parameters
1. Minimal Time Interval of RxLev Power Adjust (PcMinInterval)
Description: This parameter specifies minimum interval of power
control. Usually, two survey reports with the original transmission
power will be received after the power control. The signal level
information contained in the reports is not accurate and should be
ignored (other information, such as adjacent cell information, is still
valid). Therefore, a minimum interval of power control should be set.
All the signal level information within this period will be ignored.
Value range: 0 ~ 32
Default value: 2
2. Allow Uplink Power Control (PwrControlUl)

150 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Description: This parameter determines whether to enable uplink


power control in the cell, that is, whether to carry out power control on
MS in the cell.
Value range: True: Enabling uplink power control; False: Disabling
uplink power control
Default value: True
3. Allow Downlink Power Control (PwrControlDl)
Description: This parameter determines whether to enable the
downlink power control in the cell. That is, whether to carry out the
power control on BTS.
Value range: True: Enabling downlink power control; False: Disabling
downlink power control
Default value: True
4. MS TxPwr Increase Step (PwrIncStep)
Description: Power increase step is the parameter used in both
directions.
Value range: See Table 146 for value range of MS TxPwr increase step.

T ABLE 146 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S TXP WR I NCRE ASE S TEP

Value Corresponding Step


0 2 dB
1 4 dB
2 6 dB

Default value: 0
5. MS TxPwr Decrease Step (PwrRedStep)
Description: Power decrease step is the parameter used in both
directions.
Value range: See Table 147 for value range of MS TxPwr decrease step.

T ABLE 147 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S TXP WR DECREASE S TEP

Value Corresponding Step


0 2 db
1 4 dB
2 6 dB

Default value: 0
6. MS Max. TxPwr (MsTxPwrMax)
Description: The network controls the transmission power used during
communication between MS and BTS, and also sets power for MS

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 151


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

through the power command, which is sent on SACCH (The SACCH has
2 header bytes: One is the power control byte and the other is the
timing advance byte). MS must obtain the power control header from
the downlink SACCH and take the specified transmission power as its
output power. If the power level of MS is not enough for this output
power, it will output at the closest transmission power that is available.
This parameter determines maximum transmission power available for
MS in the cell during BSC power control. The parameter MsTxPwrMax is
also used by BSC to calculate PBGT value.
Value range: See Table 148 for value range of MS max TxPwr.

T ABLE 148 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S M AX. TXP WR

GSM900 GSM1800
Value MS output power (dBm) Value MS output power (dBm)
0~2 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
5 33 0 30
... ... ... ...
17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
19 ~ 31 5 15 ~ 28 0

Note: Usually, set this parameter to the same value as the parameter
MsTxPwrMaxCch of the cell.
Default value: 19 ~31 (5dBm) for GSM900 cell; 15 ~ 28 (0dBm) for
GSM1800 cell
7. MS Minimum TxPwr (MsTxPwrMin)
Description: Network controls transmission power used during
communication between MS and BTS, and sets power for MS through
power command, which is sent on SACCH (SACCH has 2 header bytes:
One is power control byte, and the other is timing advance byte). MS
must obtain power control header from downlink SACCH, and take
specified transmission power as its output power. MS outputs at closest
transmission power available if power level of MS is not enough for
specified output power. During BSC power control, this parameter
determines minimal transmission power (that is, lower limit of power
control) available for MS in the cell.
Value range: See Table 149 for value range of MS min TxPwr.

152 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

T ABLE 149 V ALUE R ANGE OF M S M IN. TXP WR

GSM900 GSM1800
Ms output power
Value Value MS output power (dBm)
(dBm)
0~2 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
... ... ... ...
17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
19 ~ 31 5 15 ~ 28 0

Note: For the GSM900 cell, set the default of this parameter to 19 ~31
(that is, 5dBm); for the GSM1800 cell, set the default of this
parameter to 15 ~ 28 (that is, 0dBm).
Default value: 19
8. BS Minimum TxPwr (BsTxPwrMin)
Description: Network controls transmission power used during
communication between BTS and MS, and sets power for BTS through
power command. BTS must take the transmission power specified by
the power command as its output power. During the BSC power
control, this parameter determines minimum transmission power (that
is, the lower limit of power control) available for the BTS in the cell.
Maxmium power level of BTS is Pn.
Value range: See Table 150 for value range of BS min TxPwr.

T ABLE 150 V ALUE R ANGE OF BS M IN. TXPWR

Value Minimal Output Power of BTS


0 Pn
1 Pn -2dB
... ...
15 Pn -30dB

Default value: 15

GPRS Power Control parameters


1. Uplink Power Control Strategy (UlPwrCtrl)
Description: This parameter determines uplink power control strategy
of GPRS.
Value range: See Table 151 for value range of uplink power control
strategy.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 153


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

T ABLE 151 V ALUE R ANGE OF UPLINK POWER CONTROL STRATEGY.

Value Uplink Power Control Strategy


0 No control
1 Open loop control
2 Closed loop control
3 Quality-based control
Others Reserved

Default value: 0
2. Downlink Power Control Strategy (DlPwrCtrl)
Description: This parameter determines downlink power control
strategy of GPRS.
Value range: See Table 152 for value range of downlink power control
strategy.

T ABLE 152 V ALUE R ANGE OF DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL S TRATEGY

Value Downlink Power Control Strategy


0 No control
1 Open loop control
2 Closed loop control
3 Quality-based control
Others Reserved

Default value: 0
3. Downlink Power Control Mode (PwrCtrlMode)
Description: The downlink power control mode adopted at the BTS
side. Two power control modes are available for BTS: A and B. Mode A
can be used for any assignment mode, while Mode B can only be used
for the fixed assignment mode. The parameter BTS_PWR_CTRL_MODE
determines which power control mode to be used.
Value range: See Table 153 for value range of downlink power control
mode.

T ABLE 153 V ALUE R ANGE OF DOWNLINK POWER CONTROL M ODE

Value MODE
0 A
1 B

Default value: 0
4. Value of Power Decrease based on BCCH on Mode A (P0,dB)

154 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Description: An optional parameter of downlink power control;


contained in assignment message. Use power control if P0 exists;
otherwise, do not use it. In packet transmission mode, do not change
P0 value unless re-assignment or new assignment is established, and
assignment does not contain PDCH(s) of any previous assignment.
Value range: See Table 154 for value range of power decrease based
on BCCH.

T ABLE 154 V ALUE R ANGE OF POWER DECRE ASE B ASED ON BCCH

Value Value Represented by P0


0 P0=0dB
1 P0=2dB
... ...
15 P0=30dB

Default value: 0
5. Precision (PwCtrlLev)
Description: This parameter determines power control precision of
GPRS.
Value range: 0 ~ 31
Default value: 0
6. Receive Power Strength from MS Needed (SS_BTS)
Description: This parameter is used for uplink power control of open
loop.
Value range; See Table 155 for value range of receive power strength
from MS needed.

T ABLE 155 V ALUE R ANGE OF RECEIVE P OWER S TRENGTH FROM M S NEEDED

Value Meaning
0 -110dBm
1 -109 dBm
... ...
63 -47 dBm

Default value: 1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 155


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Handover Control Parameters


Handover Pretreatment Parameters
1. Handover Control No. (HoID)
Description: Number of the object for handover control
2. Sampling Count of Uplink Intensity (HoULLevWindow)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. BSC uses a series of average values instead
of the original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions, to avoid negative impact of burst measurement values
caused by complicated radio transmission. The parameter
HoUlLevWindow is the size of the window used to calculate the average
value of the uplink signal intensity, that is, the number of samples
used in calculating the average.
Value range: 1 ~ 31
Default value: 2
3. Reserve Count of Uplink Intensity (HoULLevReserved)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. BSC uses a series of average values instead
of the original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions, to avoid the negative impact of burst measurement values
caused by complicated radio transmission. The reserved count of
adjacent cells is the number of the average values of the uplink
intensity sent in the Handover Required message.
4. Power of Uplink Intensity (HoULLevWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. When using the DTX mode, two types of measurement
data will be reported to BSC. One is the average value of the
measurement results of all timeslots in a given measurement period in
the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the
measurement results of some special timeslots in a given
measurement period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of
measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the
average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate,
because it is the average value of measurement results of all timeslots.
While the second type of measurement data is not that accurate,
because it is the average value of the measurement results of some
timeslots. Therefore, BSC needs to use different weights for these two
types of measurement data when averaging the measurement values.
The parameter HoUlLevWeight determines the weight for the first type
of measurement data (of all timeslots) when averaging the uplink
signal intensity for handover. The weight for the second type of
measurement data (of some timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3

156 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Default value: 2
5. Sampling Count of Downlink Intensity (HoDLLevWindow)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. BSC uses a series of average values instead
of the original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions, to avoid the negative impact of burst measurement values
caused by complicated radio transmission. The parameter
HoDlLevWindow (averaging window of handover downlink intensity) is
the size of the window used to calculate the average value of the
downlink signal intensity, the number of the samples used in
calculating the average.
Value range: 1 ~ 31
Default value: 2
6. Reserve Count of Downlink Intensity (HoDLLevReserved)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell is the number
of the average values of the downlink intensity that is transferred in
the Handover Required message.
7. Power of Downlink Intensity (HoDLLevWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. When using the DTX mode, two types of measurement
data will be reported to BSC. One is the average value of the
measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in
the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the
measurement results of some special timeslots within a measurement
period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of measurement
data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value.
The first type of measurement data is more accurate, because it is the
average value of the measurement results of all timeslots. The second
type is not that accurate, because it is the average value of the
measurement results of some timeslots. Therefore, BSC needs to use
different weights for these two types of measurement data when
averaging the measurement values. The parameter HoDlLevWeight
determines the weight for the first type of measurement data (of all
timeslots) when averaging the downlink signal intensity for handover.
The weight for the second type of measurement data (of some
timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 2
8. Sampling Count of Uplink Quality (HoULQualWindow)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. BSC uses a series of average values instead
of the original values of the measurement data when making handover

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 157


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

decisions, to avoid the negative impact of burst measurement values


caused by the complicated radio transmission. The parameter
HoUlQualWindow (handover uplink quality average window) is the size
of the window used to calculate the average value of the uplink signal
intensity, that is, the number of samples used in calculating the
average.
Value range: 1 ~ 31
Default value: 2
9. Reserve Count of Uplink Quality (HoULQualReserved)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell is the number
of average values of the uplink quality transferred in the Handover
Required message.
10. Power of Uplink Quality (HoULQualWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. When using the DTX mode, two types of measurement
data will be reported to BSC. One is the average value of the
measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in
the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the
measurement results of some special timeslots within a measurement
period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of measurement
data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value.
The first type of measurement data is more accurate, because it is the
average value of the measurement results of all timeslots. While the
second type of measurement data is not that accurate, because it is
the average value of the measurement results of some timeslots.
Therefore, BSC needs to use different weights for these two types of
measurement data when averaging the measurement values. The
parameter HoUlQualWeight determines the weight for the first type of
measurement data (of all timeslots) when averaging the uplink signal
quality for handover. The weight for the second type of measurement
data (of some timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 2
11. Sampling Count of Downlink Quality (HoDLQualWindow)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter HoDlQualWindow (handover downlink quality
average window) is the size of the window used to calculate the
average value of the downlink signal quality, that is, the number of
samples used in calculating the average.

158 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Value range: 1 ~ 32
Default value: 2
12. Reserve Count of Downlink Quality (HoDLQualReserved)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell is the number
of average values of the downlink quality transferred in the Handover
Required message.
13. Power of Downlink Quality (HoDLLevWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. When using the DTX mode, two types of measurement
data will be reported to BSC. One is the average value of the
measurement results of all timeslots within a given measurement
period in the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the
measurement results of some special timeslots within a given
measurement period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of
measurement data according to the actual situation for calculating the
average value. The first type of measurement data is more accurate,
because it is the average value of the measurement results of all
timeslots. The second type is not that accurate, because it is the
average value of the measurement results of some timeslots.
Therefore, BSC needs to use different weights for these two types of
measurement data when averaging the measurement values. The
parameter HoDlQualWeight determines the weight for the first type of
measurement data (of all timeslots) when averaging the downlink
signal quality for handover. The weight for the second type of
measurement data (of some timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
Value range: 1 ~ 3
Default value: 2
14. Sampling Count of Adjacent Cell (NCellWindow)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter NCellWindow (adjacent cell average window)
is the size of the window used to calculate the average value of the
signal intensity of adjacent cells, that is, the number of samples used
in calculating the average.
Value range: 1 ~ 31
Default value: 2
15. Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell (NCellReserved)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 159


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according


to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter Reserve Count of Adjacent Cell is the number
of average values of the signal intensity of adjacent cells transferred in
the Handover Required message.
16. Power of Adjacent Cell (NCellWeight)
Description: Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) mode, according to
GSM specifications, refers to a process in which the system does not
transmit signals during the voice intermittent period of the subscriber
conversation. When using the DTX mode, two types of measurement
data will be reported to BSC. One is the average value of the
measurement results of all timeslots within a measurement period in
the non-DTX mode, and the other is the average value of the
measurement results of some special timeslots within a measurement
period in the DTX mode. BSC needs to select one type of measurement
data according to the actual situation for calculating the average value.
The first type of measurement data is more accurate, because it is the
average value of the measurement results of all timeslots. The second
type is not that accurate, because it is the average value of the
measurement results of some timeslots. Therefore, BSC needs to use
different weights for these two types of measurement data when
averaging the measurement values. The parameter Adjacent Cell
Weight determines the weight for the first type of measurement data
(of all timeslots) when averaging the signal intensity of adjacent cells
for handover. The weight for the second type of measurement data (of
some timeslots) is set to 1 by default.
17. Sampling Count of Distance (DistanceWindow)
Description; BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter DistanceWindow (Sampling Count of
Distance) is the size of the window used to calculate the average value
of the distance from MS to BTS (Actually, it is the timing advance TA),
namely the number of samples used in calculating the average.
Value range: 1 ~ 31
Default value: 2
18. Reserve Count of Distance (DistanceReserved)
Description: BSC makes handover decisions in GSM system according
to the measurement data. In order to avoid the negative impact of
burst measurement values caused by the complicated radio
transmission, BSC uses a series of average values instead of the
original values of the measurement data when making handover
decisions. The parameter Reserve Count of Distance is the number of
distance averages transferred in the Handover Required message.
19. Allow Zero (ZeroAllowed)

160 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Description: MS can only report the measurement data of six adjacent


cells with the strongest signal intensity according to GSM
specifications. Therefore, the measurement results of adjacent cells
recorded by BSC may be discontinuous. In this case, record the
measurement data of the missing cell as 0 (that is, lower than -
110dBm). In order to avoid any negative impact of 0 on averaging,
suppose that 0 is allowed to appear occasionally to omit it in
calculating the average. However, excessive occurrences of 0 indicate
that this adjacent cell is of poor signal intensity. The parameter
ZeroAllowed is used to determine the occurrence of how many 0s is
normal, that is, this can be ignored in calculating the average. To be
specific, if the number of the 0s in the sample values used for the
average calculation exceeds ZeroAllowed, these sample values are with
low reliability, then the measurement average equals to the sum of the
reported values dividing NCellWindow. If the number of the 0s in the
reported values does not exceed ZeroAllowed, these sample values are
within high reliability, then the measurement average equals to the
sum of the reported values dividing the balance of NCellWindow
subtracting the number of the 0s.
Value range: 0 ~ 31
Default value: 1

Handover Threshold Parameters


1. Threshold, N value and P value of Uplink RxLev
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. Uplink receiving strength is one
of reasons for handover. Make handover decision according to: When P
of closest N average values of uplink signal intensity (P and N stand for
the number of average values) are lower than related threshold, carry
out handover to enhance uplink signal intensity. HoUlLevThs defines
related threshold, HoUlLevN defines related N value, and HoUlLevP
defines related P value.
Value range: 1HoUlLevPHoUlLevN31.
See Table 156 for value range of uplink RxLey level.

T ABLE 156 V ALUE R ANGE OF UPLINK RXLEV L EVEL

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
... ...
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: Value of HoUlLevThs is usually lower than threshold (parameter


PcUlInclLevThs in R_POC table) of the uplink power control (increase).
In other words, the power control has higher priority. Carry out the
handover if the power control does not work.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 161


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Default values: threshold = 10, P = 3, N = 4


2. Threshold, N value and P value of Downlink RxLev
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. The downlink receiving strength
is one of the reasons for handover. Make the handover decision
according to: Carry out the handover to enhance downlink signal
intensity when P of closest N average values of downlink signal
intensity (P and N stand for the number of the average values) are
lower than related threshold. The parameter HoDlLevThs defines
related threshold, the parameter HoDlLevN defines related N value,
and the parameter HoDlLevP defines related P value.
Value range: 1HoDlLevPHoDlLevN31
See Table 157 for value range of downlink RxLey threshold.

T ABLE 157 V ALUE R ANGE OF DOWNLINK RXL EV THRESHOLD

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
61 -50 ~ -49
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: Value of HoDlLevThs is usually lower than threshold (parameter


PcDlInclLevThs in R_POC table) of downlink power control (increase).
In other words, the power control has higher priority. Carry out the
handover when the power control does not work. This parameter is set
to 15 (that is, -96dBm ~ -95dBm) by default. Please note that this
parameter is 3dB higher than the value of RxLevAccessMin of the cell.
Default values: 15, P = 3, N = 4
3. Threshold, N value and P value of Uplink RxQual
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. The uplink receiving quality is
one of the reasons for handover. Make the handover decision according
to: Carry out the handover to improve the uplink signal quality when P
of the closest N average values of the uplink signal quality (P and N
stand for the number of the average values) are higher than related
threshold. The parameter HoUlQualThs defines related threshold, the
parameter HoUlQualN defines related N value, and the parameter
HoUlQualP defines related P value.
Value range: 1HoUlQualPHoUlQualN31
See Table 158 for value range of uplink RxQual threshold.

162 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

T ABLE 158 V ALUE R ANGE OF UPLINK RXQU AL THRESHOLD

Value Corresponding Quality Meaning


Level
0 0 BER<0.2%
1 1 0.2%<BER<0.4%
2 2 0.4%,<BER<0.8%
... ... ...
6 6 6.4%<BER<12.8%
7 7 12.8%<BER

Note: Value of HoUlQualThs is usually higher than threshold


(parameter PcUlInclQualThs in R_POC table) of uplink power control
(increase). In other words, power control has higher priority. Carry out
handover when power control does not work.
Default values: threshold = 4, P = 3, N = 4
4. Threshold, N value and P value of Downlink RxQual
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. Downlink receiving quality is
one of reasons for handover. Make handover decision according to:
When P of closest N average values of downlink signal quality (P and N
stand for the number of the average values) are higher than related
threshold, carry out handover to improve downlink signal quality.
HoDlQualThs defines related threshold, HoDlQualN defines related N
value, and HoDlQualP defines related P value.
Value range: 1HoDlQualPHoDlQualN31
See Table 159 for value range of downlink RxQual level.

T ABLE 159 V ALUE R ANGE OF DOWNLINK RXQU AL LEVEL

Value Corresponding Quality Level Meaning


0 0 BER<0.2%
1 1 0.2%<BER,<0.4%
2 2 0.4%<BER<0.8%
... ... ...
6 6 6.4%<BER<12.8%
7 7 12.8%<BER

Note: Value of HoDlQualThs is usually higher than the threshold


(parameter PcDlInclQualThs in R_POC table) of downlink power control
(increase). In other words, the power control has higher priority. Carry
out the handover when the power control does not work.
Default values: threshold = 4, P = 3, N = 4
5. Threshold, N value and P value of Uplink RxLev of Internal Handover

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 163


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,


depends on a series of average values. Uplink interference (of same
frequency) is one of the reasons for handover. Make the handover
decision according to: Carry out the handover to weaken the uplink
interference (of the same frequency) when the handover conditions for
the uplink quality are satisfied and if P of the closest N average values
of the uplink signal intensity (P and N stand for the number of the
average values) are higher than related threshold. The parameter
IntraHoUlLevThs defines related threshold, the parameter
IntraHoUlLevN defines related N value, and the parameter
IntraHoUlLevP defines related P value. Carry out the internal handover
in the cell whenever the handover condition is met.
Value range: 1IntraHoUlLevPIntraHoUlLevN31
See Table 160 for value range of uplink RxLey threshold of internal
handover.

T ABLE 160 V ALUE R ANGE OF UPLINK RXLEV THRESHOLD OF INTERN AL HANDOVER

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
61 -50 ~ -49
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: Value of IntraHoUlLevThs is usually higher than threshold


(parameter PcUlRedLevThs in R_POC table) of uplink power control
(decrease).
Default value: threshold = 35, P = 3, N = 4
6. Threshold, N value and P value of Downlink RxLev of Internal Handover
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. Downlink frequency
interference is one of the reasons for handover. Make the handover
decision according to: Carry out the handover to weaken the downlink
frequency interference when the handover condition for the downlink
quality is met and if P of the closest N average values of the downlink
signal intensity (P and N stand for the number of the average values)
are higher than related threshold. The parameter IntraHoDlLevThs
defines related threshold, the parameter IntraHoDlLevN defines related
N value, and the parameter IntraHoDlLevP defines related P value.
Carry out the internal handover in the cell whenever the handover
condition is met.
Value range: 1IntraHoDlLevPIntraHoDlLevN31
Table 161See Table 161 for value range of downlink RxLev threshold of
internal handover.

164 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

T ABLE 161 V ALUE R ANGE OF DOWNLINK RXLEV THRESHOLD OF INTERN AL HANDOVER

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
61 -50 ~ -49
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: Value of IntraHoDlLevThs is usually lower than (or equal to)


threshold (parameter PcDlRedLevThs in R_POC table) value of
downlink power control (decrease).
Default values: threshold = 40, P = 3, N = 4
7. Threshold, N value and P value of C/I Allow to Access Special TRX
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. The good C/I of the current
special layer frequency is one of the reasons for concentric circle
handover. Make the handover decision according to: Carry out the
handover if the current call is on the common TRX (frequency), and P
of the closest N C/I values are higher than related threshold. C/I is the
reason for this handover, and only one handover from common TRX to
special TRX. The parameter GoodCiThs defines related threshold, the
parameter GoodCiN defines related N value, and the parameter
GoodCiP defines related P value.
Value range: 1GoodCiPGoodCiN31
See Table 162 for value range of threshold of C/1 allow to access
special TRX.

T AB L E 1 6 2 V AL U E R AN G E O F TH R E S H O L D O F C / I AL L O W TO AC C E S S S P E C I AL TR X

Value Corresponding C/I Value


0 -127 db
1 -126 dB
... ...
255 128 dB

Default values: threshold = 133, P = 3, N = 4


8. Threshold, N value and P value of C/I when Allow Handover from
Special TRX
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. C/I of the current special layer
frequency is one of the reasons for concentric circle handover. Make
the handover decision according to: Carry out the handover if current

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 165


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

call is on special TRX (frequency), and P of closest N C/I values are


lower than related threshold. C/I is the reason for this handover, and
only one handover from special TRX to common TRX. The parameter
BadCiThs defines related threshold, the parameter BadCiN defines
related N value, and the parameter BadCiP defines related P value.
Value range: 1BadCiPBadCiN31
See Table 163 for value range of threshold of C/1 when allow handover
from special TRX.

T ABL E 163 V AL UE R AN GE O F TH RE SH OL D O F C/I W HE N AL L OW H AND OV ER FR OM


SPECIAL TRX

Value Corresponding C/I Value


0 -127dB
1 -126dB
2 -125dB
... ...
255 128dB

Default values: threshold = 130, P = 3, N = 4


9. Rapid handover of Threshold and N value
Description: Some parameters are necessary for rapid attenuation
handover. RapidHoThs is the threshold of signal intensity. The
condition of the rapid attenuation handover is met when the measured
signal intensity of a call is continuously lower than this threshold. The
candidate cell is a specific related cell in adjacent cells. RapidHoN is a
counter value, minimum times that measured signal intensity value of
calls are always lower that threshold.
Value range: 1 ~ 31
See Table 164 for value range of RapidHoThs.

T ABLE 164 V ALUE R ANGE OF R APID HANDOVER LEVEL

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
... ...
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: RapidHoThs parameter is set as 15 (-96 dBm ~ -95 dBm) by


default, same as level threshold of common handover. The setting of
the parameter RapidHoN should ensure that the rapid handover is at
least faster than the common signal level handover.

166 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Default value: threshold = 10, N=1


10. Threshold of Macro-Micro Handover
Description: Some parameters are necessary for macro-micro
handover. The macro-micro handover threshold is a signal intensity
threshold. The call can be handed over to this adjacent micro cell when
the measured value of the signal intensity of an adjacent micro cell is
always higher than the MacroMicroHoThs value (threshold) for a
certain number of times. This can enable a slowly moving MS to enter
the micro cell layer. Number of times mentioned above depends on
MacroMicroHoN parameter of each adjacent cell.
Value range: See Table 165 for value range of Macro-Micro handover
level.

T ABLE 165 V ALUE R ANGE OF M ACRO-M ICRO HANDOVER LEVEL

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
... ...
61 -50 ~ -49
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Default value: 20
11. N value of Macro-Micro Handover
Description: Some parameters are necessary for macro-micro
handover. There is a signal intensity threshold and a counter value. N
value of the macro-micro handover (MacroMicroHoN) is a counter value
that is related to a given adjacent micro cell. The call can be handed
over to this adjacent micro cell when the measured value of the signal
intensity of this adjacent micro cell is consecutively higher than the
MacroMicroHoThs value for MacroMicroHoN times. This enables a
slowly moving MS to enter the micro cell. This parameter describes the
counter value used by local cell as micro cell.
Value range: 1 ~ 255
Note: The setting of the parameter MacroMicroHoN in local micro cell is
subject to the size of local cell and standard used to measure the
moving speed of MS.
Default value: 2
12. P value and N value of Distance Handover
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. The distance between MS and
BTS is also one reason for handover. Make the handover decision
according to: When P of the closest N average values of the timing
advance (P and N stand for the number of the average values) are
higher than related threshold, carry out the handover to make MS stay

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 167


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

inside the service range of the cell. The parameter DistanceN defines
the relevant N value, and the parameter DistanceP defines the relevant
P value.
Value range: 1DistancePDistanceN32
See Table 166 for value range of distance handover level.

T ABLE 166 V ALUE R ANGE OF DISTANCE H ANDOVER LEVEL

Corresponding Timing Corresponding Distance


DistanceThs
Advance from MS to BTS (Approx.)
0 0 550m
1 1 1100m
2 2 1650m
... ... ...
63 63 34650m

Default values: P = 3, N = 4

Handover Condition Parameters


1. Minimal Interval (HoMinInterval)
Description: The system can restrict the frequent inter-cell handover
through the parameter HoMinInterval to prevent MS that is just
handed over to a cell from being immediately handed over to another
cell (which often occurs on the border of two cells), and thus ensuring
the communication quality and the system performance. This
parameter defines a time length. That is, the next handover is possible
only when the time from the last handover of MS exceeds this value.
Please note that this parameter affects only the inter-cell handover,
but not the common intra-cell handover or the intra-cell concentric
handover. Besides, every micro cell has its own handover strategies.
Therefore, this parameter works only for the macro cell or upper
layers.
Value range: See Table 167 for value range of minimum time interval.

T ABLE 167 V ALUE R ANGE OF M INIMUM TIME INTERV AL

Value Time represented


0 0s
1 1s
... ...
31 31s

Note: 5 for a macro cell, and 0 for a micro cell

168 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Default value: 5
2. Hierachy Priority Choose Parameter: Hierachy priority choose
parameter of the level/Quality handover (LayerPripority)
Description: Three options are available to selecting and sequencing
candidate cells for calls when the condition for the level/quality
handover (signal level and signal quality) is met:
Adjacent cells at the upper layer of local cell have the highest
priority for call handover, then adjacent cells at the same layer,
and finally other adjacent cells;
Adjacent cells at the same layer of local cell have the highest
priority for call handover, then adjacent cells at the upper layer,
and finally other adjacent cells;
All adjacent cells have the same priority.
This parameter determines which one of the above three options will
be selected. When carrying out the handover control related to
level/quality during the service process, this parameter has a higher
priority than adjacent cell.
Value range: 1 (UPPER_LAYER): Adjacent cells at upper layer have
highest priority, then those at the same layer, and finally other
adjacent cells; 2 (SAME_LAYER): Adjacent cells at same layer have
highest priority, then those at the upper layer, and finally other
adjacent cells; 3 (ALL_LAYER): All adjacent cells have same priority.
Note: Generally option 1 is adopted for the micro cell. That is, when it
is necessary to hand over the call in the micro cell because of signal
quality or intensity problems, the macro cell layer has the highest
priority for the call handover. While for the macro cell, option 2 is
generally adopted. That is, when it is necessary to hand over a call in
the macro cell because of signal quality or intensity problems, other
macro cells have the highest priority.
3. Hierarchy that can apply standard PBGT HO (PbgtHoLayer)
Description: Some restrictions or controls are necessary for the
standard PBGT handover in multi-layer and dual-band network
applications. The parameter PbgtHoLayer is just used to control the
applications of the PBGT handover.
Value range: See Table 168 for value range of hierarchy can use
standard PBGT HO.

T ABLE 168 V ALUE R ANGE OF HIERARCHY CAN USE S TANDARD PBGT HO

Value Meaning
0 0: PBGT handover to adjacent cells at the same layer but of different
frequency is impossible; 1: PBGT handover to adjacent cells at the same
layer but of a different frequency is possible
1 0: PBGT handover to adjacent cells without hierarchy is impossible; 1:
PBGT handover to adjacent cells without hierarchy is possible
2 0: PBGT handover to adjacent cells at the upper layer is impossible; 1:
PBGT handover to adjacent cells at the upper layer is possible
3 0: PBGT handover to adjacent cells at the lower layer is impossible; 1:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 169


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value Meaning
PBGT handover to adjacent cells at the lower layer is possible

Default value: 0
4. Maximal TxPwr (MSPWRMAX)
Description: It is maximum transmission power available for MS in
adjacent cells.
5. Level of Minimal RxLev (RxLevMin)
Description: Minimum receiving strength level (on BCCH channel)
needed to hand over MS to local cell. This is one of the parameters to
distinguish the priority cell during a handover control process. MS in
the cell monitors constantly the intensity on the BCCH channel of
adjacent cells. But only adjacent cells with receiving strength higher
than RxLevMin can be potential candidates for the handover. Handover
may occur when RxLevMin of MS required by adjacent cells is lower
than RxLevMin of MS required by local cell. This indicates that MS is at
the edge of the cell.
Value range: See Table 169 for value range of minimum RxLev level.

T ABLE 169 V ALUE R ANGE OF LEVEL OF M INIMAL RXL EV

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
63 > -48

Default value: 15
6. Handover Method (HoPatternInd)
Description: Three modes are available for the handover according to
specifications:
Synchronization: TA of destination cell is the same as that of the
source cell
Asynchronization: TA of destination cell is unknown
Pseudo-synchronization: MS is able to calculate the TA of the
destination cell
This parameter determines what handover modes are available for
BSC.
Value range: See Table 170 for value range of handover method.

170 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

T ABLE 170 V ALUE R ANGE OF H ANDOVER M ETHOD

Position Meaning
Bit 1 1: Synchronous handover is possible; 0: Synchronous handover is impossible
Bit 2 1: Asynchronous handover is possible; 0: Asynchronous handover is
impossible
Bit 3 1: Pseudo-synchronous handover is possible; 0: Pseudo-synchronous
handover is impossible
Bit 4 -
Bit 5 ~ 8 Reserved; always 0

Note: Generally, set 1 and 2 as False. Set 3 also as False to speed up


partial handovers. At present, always set 4 to True.
Default values: True: Synchronization; True: Asynchronization; False:
Pseudo-synchronization

Handover Control Parameters


Description: The specifications define multiple trigger conditions for the
handover. The introduction of micro cells also brings many handover
algorithms. Except for the basic handover types based on the receiving
strength and quality, it is not a must for the cell to implement other
optional handover types. The parameter HoControl determines whether to
implement other handover types in the cell.

Value range: HoControl is a 17-bit bitmap. See Table 171 for value range
of HoControl.

T ABLE 171 V ALUE R ANGE OF HOCONTROL

Position Meaning
1 1: SDCCH handover possible
0: SDCCH handover impossible
2 1: Inter-cell handover caused by uplink interference is possible
0: Inter-cell handover caused by uplink interference is impossible
3 1: Inter-cell handover caused by downlink interference is possible
0: Inter-cell handover caused by downlink interference is impossible
4 1: Handover caused by distance is possible
0: Handover caused by distance is impossible
5 1: The standard PBGT handover is possible
0: The standard PBGT handover is impossible
6 1: Automatic handover based on traffic is possible
0: Automatic handover based on traffic is impossible
7 1: Direction-based handover possible
0: Direction-based handover impossible

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 171


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Position Meaning
8 1: Concentric circle handover possible
0: Concentric circle handover impossible
9 1: Possible to carry out the inter-cell handover caused by downlink
interference between channels of the super TRX
0: Impossible to carry out the inter-cell handover caused by downlink
interference between channels of the super TRX
10 1: Possible to carry out the inter-cell handover caused by uplink interference
between channels of the super TRX
0: Impossible to carry out the inter-cell handover caused by uplink
interference between channels of the super TRX
11 1: Possible to carry out the inter-adjacent sector handover caused by PBGT
between channels of the super TRX
0: Impossible to carry out the inter-adjacent sector handover caused by PBGT
between channels of the super TRX
12 1: Allow to use the dynamic modulating process of handover priority
0: Not allow to use the dynamic modulating process of handover priority
13 1: Rapid handover possible
0: Rapid handover impossible
14 1: Macro-micro delay handover is possible
0: Macro-micro delay handover is impossible
15 1: Micro-micro delay handover is possible
0: Micro-micro delay handover is impossible
16 Reserved; always 0
17 1: Handover based on path loss and TA is possible
0: Handover based on path loss and TA is impossible

Note: Generally, set positions 1, 4 and 7 to True, 2, 3, 5 and 6 to False in


multi-layer or dual-band network applications. Setting of positions 8, 9
and 10 depends on specific conditions, while generally are set to True. For
micro cell, set position 15 to False and 14 to True. For macro cell, set
position 14 to False and 15 to True. Generally set 12 and 3 to True and 11
to False.

Other Parameters
1. Handover Failure Penalty Period (HoFailPentaltyTime)
Description: It is a protection period to prevent immediate handover
after handover failure has occurred. The unit time is the period of
survey or pretreatment survey report.
Value range: 1 ~ 255
Default value: 7
2. Allowed Dynamic Priority Difference (DynPrioOffset)
Description: It is tolerable dynamic priority difference between
destination cell and local cell during a handover. Check successively
tolerable dynamic priority difference, tolerable power budget

172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

difference, and moving direction of MS, in handover algorithm of the


cell.
Value range: 1 ~ 7
Default value: 1
3. Allowed PBGT Difference (PbgtOffset)
Description: It is the tolerable power budget difference between
destination cell and local cell during a handover.
Value range: 1 ~ 20
Default value: 3
4. Control Value of Handover on Traffic (hierarchy) (TrafficHoLayerCtrl)
Description: The control value of layer for traffic handover, layer with
the highest priority for a handover
Value range: 0 ~ 3
Default value: 1 (same layer)
5. Control Value of Handover on Traffic (frequency) (TrafficHoFreqCtrl)
Description: The control value of layer for traffic handover, frequency
with the highest priority for a handover
Value range: 0 ~ 1
Default value is 0
6. Threshold of Handover on Traffic (TrafficThs)
Description: The threshold used by the database for traffic alarm in a
cell.
Value range: 30 ~ 100
Default value: 70
7. Default Minimal RxLev (RLMDEF)
Description: It is the default minimum threshold for receiving strength
used during handover to the undefined adjacent cell.
Default value: Set this parameter to 15
8. Default Maximal TxPwr (TPM)
Description: It is the default maximum transmission power required by
MS in the undefined adjacent cell.
Default value: Set this parameter to 15
9. Default Minimal PBGT Threshold (PbgtDEF)
Description: It is the default minimum threshold value for receiving
strength used during handover to the undefined adjacent cell.
Default value: Set this parameter to 15
10. TaIntraThs, TaIntraHyst, TaIntraP, TaIntraN
Description: Another service handover type, TA-based intra-cell
handover, is available after support the extended cell. These four

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 173


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

parameters respectively control the threshold, hysteresis, P value and


N value of the TA-based on the intra-cell handover.
Value range: See Table 172 for value range of parameter.

T ABLE 172 V ALUE R ANGE OF P AR AMETER

Parameter Meaning Value Range


TaIntraThsTaIntraThs Threshold of TA-based intra-cell handover 1 ~ 63
TaIntraHystTaIntraHyst Hysteresis of TA-based intra-cell handover 1~5
TaIntraPTaIntraP P value of TA-based intra-cell handover 1 ~ 32
TaIntraNTaIntraN N value of TA-based intra-cell handover 1 ~ 32

Note: The TaIntraThs parameter is set to 60 by default, and


TaIntraHyst to 1.The P and N values can be set to 3 and 4 respectively.

Handover Arithmetic Parameters


1. Traffic Handover Level Threshold (TrafficLevThs)
Description: This parameter is for traffic handover. Set a TrafficLevThs,
change from Level of adjacent cell must be over condition of local cell
to Level of adjacent cell must be over threshold of local cell. This
threshold can be negative. It allows handover, when level is well in this
cell and level in adjacent cell (like 1800 M cell) is also well, although a
little lower than that of local cell. It increases effect of traffic handover
greatly. This threshold must be smaller than PBGT threshold in reverse
direction. Otherwise, it may result in Ping Pong handover.
Value range: 0 ~ 48 (level threshold 24 ~ 24 db)
Default value: 0
2. Penalty Downlink Level Offset (PenaltyLevOffset)
Description: Perform an offset on the downlink level of this cell in
penalty period.
Value range: 0 ~ 63 dB
Default value: 15
3. Uplink Interference handover Quality Offset in the Cell (QoffSetUl)
Description: See relations between level and quality to judge whether
there are interferences in service judgment channel when handover
occurs in the cell. In rxqual-ul> = QOffSetUl + FQSS (RXLEV_UL+
SOffSetUl) or rxqual-dl>= QOffSetDl + FQSS (RXLEV_DL+ SOffSetDl),
rxqual-xx is uplink/downlink quality, QoffSetxx is uplink/downlink
quality offset; RXLEV_XX is uplink/downlink level; SoffSetxx is
uplink/downlink level offset. Service informs database of situation in
original occupied channel when applying for channels after confirming
the interference. Database will select sitable channel according to this
message.
Value range: 0 ~ 2 (quality offset 1 ~ 1)

174 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Default value: 0
4. Uplink Interference Handover Level Offset in the Cell (SOffSetUl)
Description: Same as Uplink Interference handover Quality Offset in
the Cell (QOffSetUl).
Value range: 0 ~ 20 (level offset 10 ~ 10 dB)
Default value: 5
5. Downlink Interference handover Quality Offset in the Cell (QOffSetDl)
Description: Same as Uplink Interference handover Quality Offset in
the Cell (QOffSetUl).
Value range: 0 ~ 2 (quality offset 1 ~ 1)
Default value: 0
6. Downlink Interference Handover Level Offset in the Cell (SOffSetDl)
Description: Same as Uplink Interference handover Quality Offset in
the Cell (QOffSetUl).
Value range: 0 ~ 20 (level offset 10 ~ 10 dB)
Default value: 0
7. Invalid Handover Judge Time in the Cell (TMaxIHo)
Description: A user performs handover continuously in the cell to
indicate that it is interfered greatly in this position and it cannot find a
suitable channel. It is better to forbid it to perform handover in some
time. Judging method: Handover occurs during timer TmaxIHo. Former
handover has no effect on interference. Add 1 to timer HoCount and
restart TmaxIHo at the same time. Former handover is valid if it
occurs before timer exceeds. Clear counter to 0. There is no
need to retry any more if the counter reads MaxIHo. Punish in
penalty mode in the cell.
Value range: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 16
8. Invalid Handover Max Times in the Cell (MaxIHo)
Description: Same as Invalid Handover Judge Time in the Cell
(TMaxIHo)
Value range: 0 ~ 10
Default value: 3
9. Max Path Loss for Forced Transfer Allowed (MaxLossThs)
Description: Directional transfer only aims to one designated cell and it
is restricted by a permitted level difference MaxLevDiff. It is lower than
PBGT handover threshold in reverse direction, to avoid surge handover.
Directional transfer will not result in congestion of destination cell.
Therefore, set a transfer reserved resource threshold HoForceResThs.
Transfer forcedly when destination cell resource is less than the
threshold.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 175


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Select users with small path loss and small TA as transferred users.
Transfer them when their path loss is smaller than the threshold
MaxLossThs and TA is smaller than the threshold MaxTAThs. This
arithmetic applies to dual-frequency networking, cells of 900 M and
1800 M use same site.
Judge only on path loss when MaxTAThs is 63 and judge only on TA
when MaxLossThs is 150.
Adopt N or P mode to judge in actual situations, that is, handover
conditions are met if HoForceP meets HoForceN measurement reports.
Path loss L=BS_TXPWR - AV_RXLEV_DL
BS_TXPWR is transmission power of CA where occupation time slot
locates. It depends on CA maximum transmission power, static
attenuation power and power control. AV_RXLEV_DL is downlink
receiving level.
Forced transfer handover must meet following requirements:
Level of destination cell must be higher than local cell (MaxLevDiff)
Available resource of destination cell must be over transfer
reserved resource threshold (HoForceResThs)
Path loss L must be less than MaxLossThs and TA must be less than
MaxTAThs
Destination cell is forced transferred cell
Value range: 0 ~ 150 (dB)
Default value: 110
10. Max Time Ahead for Forced Transfer Allowed (MaxTAThs)
Description: Same as Max Path Loss for Forced Transfer Allowed
(MaxLossThs)
Value range: 0 ~ 63
Default value: 5
11. N for Forced Transfer Handover Judge (HoForceN)
Description: Same as Max Path Loss for Forced Transfer Allowed
(MaxLossThs)
Value range: 1<= HoForceP<=HoForceN<=31
Default value: 5
12. P for Forced Transfer Handover Judge (HoForceP)
Description: Same as Max Path Loss for Forced Transfer Allowed
(MaxLossThs)
Value range: 1<= HoForceP<=HoForceN<=31
Default value: 3

176 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Adjacent Cell Handover and


Reselection Parameters
1. Adjacent Cell Handover Object No. (hrid)
Description: It is the unique identification of the reselection object for
adjacent cell handover.
Value range: 65 ~ 96
2. Cell Handover Priority (Pri)
Description: Consider cell priority according to specifications when
sorting candidate cells during handover. Besides, there are two other
determinants, traffic and radio status. Priority and traffic play a major
role in cell sequencing. When the sorting based on these two gives the
same result, sequence the cells according to the radio status.
Value range: 0 ~ 7; the larger the value is, the higher the priority will
be.
Default value: 3
3. Adjacent Cell Max TxPwr (MTPMax)
Description: The network controls the transmission power during the
communication between MS and BTS, and sets the power for MS by
using the power command, which is sent on SACCH (The SACCH has 2
header bytes: One is the power control byte, and the other is the
timing advance byte). MS must obtain the power control header from
the downward SACCH, and takes the specified transmission power as
its output power. If the power level of the MS cannot meet the
specified power, it will output at the closest transmission power. This
parameter stands for the maximum transmission power available for
the MS in the cell during BSC power control. The parameter
MsTxPwrMax is also used by BSC to calculate the PBGT value.
Value range: See Table 173 for value range of adjacent cell max
TXPWR.

T AB L E 1 7 3 V AL U E R AN G E O F AD J AC E N T C E L L M AX T X P W R

GSM900 GSM1800
Value MS output power (dBm) Value MS output power (dBm)
0~2 39 29 36
3 37 30 34
4 35 31 32
5 33 0 30
... ... ... ...
17 9 13 4
18 7 14 2
19 ~ 31 5 15 ~ 28 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 177


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Default value: Same as maximum power level of control channel


(MsTxPwrMaxCch) in a cell.
4. Min RxLev Needed (RLMin)
Description: MS access to the system is of poor quality and cannot
guarantee normal communication process in case of low receiving
signal level. Besides, it is a great waste of radio resources of the
network. Therefore, the GSM specifications set this parameter, that is,
the minimum receiving level, as the threshold for the receiving level of
the MS when accessing the network. Besides, it is also one of the
standards for the MS to select and reselect cell (a parameter to
calculate C1 and C2). This parameter is broadcasted to all MSs in a cell
through the RIL3_RR SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE3 and TYPE4
messages. The parameter RxLevMin is also a parameter of cell
selection.
Value range: See Table 174 for value rang of min RxLev needed.

T ABLE 174 V ALUE R ANGE OF M IN RXLEV NEEDED

Value Corresponding Level Value (dBm)


0 < -110
1 -110 ~ -109
2 -109 ~ -108
... ...
62 -49 ~ -48
63 > -48

Note: Generally, the value of this parameter should be close to the MS


receiving sensitivity. For some cells with overloaded traffic, the cell
RxLevAccessMin may be increased according to the actual requirement
to decrease the C1 and C2 values of the cell, and thus decreasing the
effective coverage range of the cell. However, a high value of
RxLevAccessMin may lead to creating a blind area manually at the
cell boundaries. At the preliminary running stage of the network, this
parameter is generally set to 10 (that is, -101 dBm ~ -100 dBm) or
lower, higher than the MS receiving sensitivity (-102 dBm). However,
when the network is expanded or when radio coverage is not a
problem in some cells, this parameter of the related cell can be
increased by 2 (dB).
Default value: 15
5. Cell Layer Num (NCLayer)
Description: It is possible to form multi-layer radio coverage in same
physical areas with the introduction of multi-layer and dual-frequency
network technology, to provide various handover strategies. These
handover strategies will not be described in detail in this manual. We
can summarize these strategies like this: 1) Restricting the PBGT
handover defined by the specifications within the same layer can
reduce the handover times during a call, and meanwhile enhances the
system reliability and communication quality. 2) The strategies for
macro-micro handover depends on the moving speed of the MS. The

178 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

MS moving with high speed tries to enter the macro cell (the upper
layer of the micro cell layer), while the MS moving with slow speed
tries to enter the micro cell layer (the lower layer of the macro cell
layer). 3) The undefined cell of the service cell can be considered as
the candidate cell only in non-PBGT handover and emergencies.
Value range: This parameter can be considered as a data array, each
element of which is used to determine the hierarchical relationship
between the relevant adjacent cells and local cell. The parameter
NCellNum determines the number of cells in the array. See Table 175
for value range of cell layer num.

T ABLE 175 V ALUE R ANGE OF CELL L AYER NUM

Value Meaning
0 N: Undefined
1 SAME: Adjacent cell and local cell are in the same layer (PBGT handover
possible)
2 UPPER: Adjacent cell is the upper layer of local cell (when local cell is a
micro cell)
3 LOWER: Adjacent cell is the lower layer of local cell (when local cell is a
macro cell)
Other values Reserved

Note: See Table 176 for value range of cell layer num.

T ABLE 176 V ALUE R ANGE OF CELL L AYER NUM

GSM GSM GSM


Adjacent cells GSM Micro-
Sector 900M 1800M 1800M
900M micro-
Local cell cell Micro Macro Micro
Macro cell cell
cell cell cell
Sector cell N N N N N N
GSM900M macro N SAME LOWER N LOWER LOWER
cell
GSM900M micro N UPPER SAME UPPER N LOWER
cell
GSM1800M macro N N LOWER SAME LOWER LOWER
cell
GSM1800M micro N UPPER N UPPER SAME LOWER
cell
Micro-micro-cell N UPPER N UPPER N N

6. Handover PBGT Threshold (HoMargin)


Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. PBGT value of a certain
adjacent cell is also one reason for handover. Make the handover
decision according to: Carry out the handover to find a more suitable

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 179


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

cell when the PBGT value of an adjacent cell is higher than the related
threshold. The parameter HoMarginPbgt stands for threshold that must
be used for the PBGT handover from an adjacent cell to local cell.
Value range: See Table 177 for value range of minimal PBGT
threshold.

T ABLE 177 V ALUE R ANGE OF M INIM AL PBGT THRESHOLD

Value Value Represented


0 -24dB
1 -23dB
... ...
47 23dB
48 24dB

Default value: 30
7. Handover Level Threshold (HMRL)
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. Adjacent cells must be
screened and sequenced during the handover caused by level. The
parameter HoMarginRxLev stands for the threshold used during the
handover from an adjacent cell to local cell because of signal intensity.
Value range: See Table 178 for value range of minimal threshold of
RxLev HO.

T ABLE 178 V ALUE R ANGE OF M INIM AL THRESHOLD OF RXLEV HO

Value Value Represented


0 -24dB
1 -23dB
... ...
48 24 dB

Default value: 30
8. Handover Quality Threshold (HMRQ)
Description: Handover decision, according to GSM specifications,
depends on a series of average values. Adjacent cells must be
screened and sequenced during the handover caused due to poor
quality. The parameter HoMarginRxQual stands for the threshold that
must be used during the handover from an adjacent cell to local cell
because of signal quality.
Value range: See Table 179 for value range of micro level of quality
handover.

180 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

T ABLE 179 V ALUE R ANGE OF M ICRO LEVEL OF QUALITY HANDOVER

Value Value Represented


0 -24dB
1 -23dB
... ...
47 23dB
48 24dB

Default value: 30
9. Related Cell (IsRCell)
Description: Only the cell related to the service cell can be a candidate
in rapid fading handover. This is a parameter of adjacent cell, and is
used to indicate whether adjacent cell is related to the service cell.
Value range: False: Adjacent cell is not related to the service cell;
True: Adjacent cell is related to the service cell
Default value: False
10. Synchronize to Adjacent Cell (Sync)
Description: This parameter indicates whether adjacent cell and local
cell belong to the same center module.
Value range: True/False
11. Related Cell DN
Description: The parameter indicates whether it is DN (BssId-SiteId-
BtsId-Hold) of the handover cell or DN (EcId) of the external cell.

Adjacent Cell Handover


Parameters
Please refer to Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters.

Adjacent Cell Reselection


Parameters
Please refer to Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection Parameters.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 181


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Frequency Hopping System


Parameters
1. Frequency Hopping No. (FHSId)
Description: MAI, according to the Frequency Hopping (FH) algorithm
defined by the GSM 05.02 specifications, is a function of TDMA Frame
Number (FN), Hopping Sequence Number (HSN) and Mobile Allocation
Index Offset (MAIO). HSN determines the operation track of the
frequency during the frequency hopping process. For the cells close to
each other and with the same MA, using different HSNs can avoid
frequency utilization conflict during the frequency hopping process.
Different TSs can share the same group of MAs and the corresponding
HSNs. The only difference lies in that the MAIO is contained in the TS
attribute.
Value range: 0 ~ 63
HSN = 0 is a special FH, that is, cyclic FH
Note: Use different HSNs for cells close to each other and with same
MA, to avoid conflict of frequency utilization in the FH process.
2. Frequency Hopping Mode (FreqHopMode)
Description: It determines Frequency Hopping Mode used by the cell.
Value range: 0: No frequency hopping; 1: basic band frequency
hopping; 2: radio frequency hoping
3. Frequency Group (MaArfcnList)
Description: Lists absolute RF channel number of each frequency in FH
group; a sub-set of CA of the cell. This set conveys related information
to the MS when notifying it which channel to use.
Value range: Not more than 64

Channel Parameters
1. Channel No. (ChId)
Description: A number to identify a channel.
2. TS radio Channel Combination
Description: This parameter indicates the channel combination mode
for TS. It is very important configuration information, and is closely
related to attributes BcchArfcn and CcchConf of a CELL. It can also be
used to check whether the configuration is correct.
Value range: See Table 180 for value range of TS radio channel
combination setting.

182 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

T ABLE 180 V ALUE R ANGE OF TS RADIO CHANNEL COMBINATION S ETTING

Value Explanations
0 TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/TF
1 TCH/H(0, 1)+ FACCH/H(0, 1)+ SACCH/TH(0, 1)
2 TCH/H(0, 0)+ FACCH/H(0, 1)+ SACCH/TH(0, 1)+ TCH/H(1, 1)
3 SDCCH/8(0..7)+ SACCH/C8(0..7)
4 FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH
5 FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4(0..3)+ SACCH/C4(0..3)
6 BCCH + CCCH
7 FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4(0..3)+ SACCH/C4(0..3)+ CBCH
8 SDCCH/8(0..7)+ SACCH/C8(0..7)+ CBCH
9 TCH/F + FACCH/F + SACCH/M
10 TCH/F + SACCH/M
11 TCH/FD + SACCH/MD
12 PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
13 PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
14 PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH
15 CTSBCH+CTSPCH+CTSARCH+CTSAGCH
16 CTSPCH+CTSARCH+CTSAGCH
17 CTSBCH
18 CTSBCH+TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/CTS
19 E-TCH/F+E-FACCH/F+SACCH/TF
20 E-TCH/F+E-FACCH/F+SACCH/M
21 E-TCH/F+SACCH/M
22 E-TCH/FD+SACCH/MD

Default value: 0
3. Train Serial Code (TSC)
Description: Training serial code of TS. There are eight kinds of
training serial codes in all, and they have little correlation with each
other. The training serial code is used by self-adaptive equalization
circuit at the receiving end as a reference for the time delay
compensation. For the TS of the BCCH channel, this parameter must
be equal to the BCC of the cell.
Value range: 0 ~ 7.
Note: This parameter must be equal to BCC of the cell for TS of BCCH
channel.
Default value: 0
4. PCM Line No. (PCMID)
Description: Serial number of the PCM line

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 183


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

5. Ts No. (TsID)
Description: It is physical TS number of CHANNEL in its TRX
Value range: 0 ~ 7
6. Sub Time Slot No. (pcmSubTs)
Description: It is sub-channel number of the logical channel (service
channel) in the physical channel (TS).
Value range: See Table 181 for value range of sub time slot No.

T ABLE 181 V ALUE R ANGE OF SUB TIME SLOT NO.

Value Conditions
0 When the TS radio Channel Combination field is 0 (TS_COMB_TCHF)
0~1 When the TS radio Channel Combination field is 1 (TS_COMB_TCHH0) or 2
(TS_COMB_TCHH1)
0~3 When the TS radio Channel Combination field is 5 (TS_COMB_MBCCHC)
0~7 When the TS radio Channel Combination field is 3 (TS_COMB_SDCCH)

7. Frequency Hopping (Hop)


Description: Whether to support frequency hopping
Value range: True: Supporting frequency hopping; False: Not
supporting frequency hopping
Default value: False
8. Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO)
Description: CA number that air interface adopts during the
communication is an element in MA. Variable Mobile Allocation Index
is to determine a definite element in MA, 0 MAIn-1. MAI is the
function of TDMA frame number FN (or decreasing number RFN), Hop
S.N. (HSN) and MAIO, according to designated hop arithmetic of GSM
specifications 05.02. MAIO is an initial offset of MAI, to prevent several
channels from grabbing same CA at the same time. Several basic
frequency hopping unit (time slot or TDMA frame) makes up a
frequency hopping group, so they have same MA and HSN, but
different MAIO. Same MA and HSN are extracted and put into list of
FHS/MA. MAIO of time slot is invalid when frequency hopping group
that time slot corresponds to doesnt hop.
Value range: 0 ~ 63
Default value: 0
9. Frequency Hopping No. (FhsID)
Description: Frequency hopping system number that this frequency
modulation corresponds to
Value range: 1 ~ 255

184 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

3G Cell Control Parameters


Basic Property Parameters
1. Cell 3G Control No. (Bts3GID)
Value range: 1
2. Whether to ask for UE to send UTRAN classmark change message
early (ECSC_3G)
Value range: True: Asking for UE to send UTRAN classmark change
message early; False: Not asking for UE to send UTRAN classmark
change message early
3. Channel Position of SI2quater Broadcast (SI2QuaterPos)
Description: This parameter is to indicate channel position of
SI2quaterbroadcast
Value range: 0: Broadcasting on normal BCCH module; 1:
Broadcasting on expanded BCCH module (AGCH_BLOCK is reserved as
1 at least)
Default value:0
4. UE report message of measurement report (ReportTypeCs)
Description: UE adopts which message to report measurement report
Value range: 0: Adopting enhanced measurement report if
configuring at least one BSIC for every frequency point in BA list
(corresponding to BAInd in this cell). Otherwise, adopting normal
measurement report; 1: Adopting normal measurement report
Default value: 0
5. Threshold of UE to start 3G reselection cell measurement (Qsearch_I)
Description: UE starts 3G reselection cell measurement when average
receiving level RLA_C of this cell is lower than (reference value: 0 ~ 7)
or higher than (reference value: 8 ~ 15)
Value range: 0 ~ 15
n = 0 ~ 6, indicating field strength L = -98 + n*4 dbm
n = 7, , indicating always
n = 8 ~ 14, indicating field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8) dbm
n = 15, , indicating never
Default value: 15
6. Threshold of UE to start 3G reselection cell measurement in special
mode (Qsearch_C)
Description: This parameter defines a threshold. UE starts adjacent
cells search when average receiving level RLA_C of this cell is lower
than (reference value: 0 ~ 7) or higher than (reference value: 8 ~ 15)
Value range: 0 ~ 15

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 185


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

n = 0 ~ 6, indicating field strength L = -98 + n*4 dbm


n = 7, , indicating always
n = 8 ~ 14, indicating field strength L = -78 + 4*(n-8)dbm
n = 15, , indicating never
Default value: 15
7. Type of 3G adjacent cells reported in measurement report
(FDDRepQntCS)
Description: This parameter is to describe type of 3G adjacent cells
reported in measurement report
Value range: 0: Received Signal Code Power (RSCP), receiving power
of CPICH channel scrambling of this 3G cell in UE, with the unit of dbm;
1: Ec/No, ratio of receiving power and hot noise of CPICH channel
scrambling, with the unit of db
Default vale: 0
8. Min value of FDD code-to-noise ratio (FDD_Qmin)
Description: Ec/No (code-to-noise ratio) of this 3G cell is larger than or
equal to the value of the cell when the cell is reselected as adjacent
cell of this 3G cell
Value range: 0 ~ 7, indicating (20 + n) dbm
Default value: 0
9. Parameters of UE to replace Qsearch_C (QsearchCInit) before getting
Qsearch_C parameters in special mode
Description: Parameters of UE to replace Qsearch_C (QsearchCInit)
before getting Qsearch_C parameters in special mode
Value range: 0: Using Qsearch_I parameter; 1: , indicating always
measuring
Default value: 0
10. Adjacent cells with same frequency in measurement report
(SvrBandRprtCS)
Description: Max adjacent cells with same frequency band as service
cell in measurement report or strongest cells list
Value range: 0 ~ 3
Default value: 2
11. Least offset of RSCP over all GSM adjacent cells RLA_C that the cell
requires when reselected as 3G adjacent cell (FDD_Qoffset)
Description: the cell can be reselected as 3G adjacent cell if meeting
following three requirements, if one 3G adjacent cell has been switched
on (3G cell must meet certain requirements) and meets the
requirement of starting measurement of this cell
RSCP of this adjacent cell is higher than average receiving level
RLA_C of this cell

186 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

RSCP of this adjacent cell is higher than RLA_C of all adjacent GSM
cells by at least FDD_Qoffset, and lasts over 5 seconds
(FDD_Qoffset of the cell must increase by 5 db if it is reselected as
3G adjacent cell 15 seconds ago)
Ec/No (code-noise ratio) of this adjacent cell is larger than or equal
to FDD_Qmin designated by this cell
Select largest cell in RSCP if more than one 3G cell meets above
requirements
Value range: 0 ~ 15
Default value: 15
12. Frequency of adjacent cell to report measurement report
(ReportRateCS)
Description: Frequency of adjacent cell to report measurement report
Value range: 0: Normal; 1: Low
Default value: 0
13. Multiple frequency band report CS (MulBndRprtCS)
Description: This parameter is to control reports of different adjacent
cells in other frequency bands except the frequency band that service
cell locates in
Value range: 0 ~ 3
0: MS reports 6 strongest measurement results that NCC knows and
permits according to the strength of adjacent cell, no matter which
frequency band this adjacent cell locates in
1: MS reports measurement result of one adjacent cell with strongest
signal of all frequency bands in adjacent cells list (excluding frequency
bad of this cell). It reports adjacent cell in frequency band of this cell in
rest places. It reports adjacent cell with hypo-strong signals if there
still are residual places, no matter which frequency band it locates in
2: MS reports measurement result of two adjacent cells with strongest
signal of all frequency bands in adjacent cells list (excluding frequency
bad of this cell). It reports adjacent cell in frequency band of this cell in
rest places. It reports adjacent cell with hypo-strong signals if there
still are residual places, no matter which frequency band it locates in
3 MS reports measurement result of three adjacent cells with
strongest signal of all frequency bands in adjacent cells list (excluding
frequency bad of this cell). It reports adjacent cell in frequency band of
this cell in residual places. It reports adjacent cell with hypo-strong
signals if there still are residual places, no matter which frequency
band it locates in
Default value: 0
14. Increased offset when UE reports signal field strength (ScaleOrdCS)
Description: Increased offset when UE reports signal field strength. UE
maps n+ ScaleOrdCS to the value that original n corresponds to when
mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), if actual field strength of one GSM
adjacent cell is only n dbm. It is only applicable to enhanced
measurement report message. UE reports actual value by setting this

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 187


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

parameter if field strength of adjacent cell is over 48 dbm. UE will


report value of SCALE used in reported enhanced measurement
report message. UE will use the value of best signal level to report if
SCALE_ORD = 2.
Value range: 0: 0db; 1: 10 db; 2: automatic, determined by UE
Default value: 0
15. 3G adjacent cells list S.N. for cell reselection (BAInd3G)
Description: 3G adjacent cells list S.N. for cell reselection, to differ
from BA list of 3G broadcasted on BCCH (described in 2quater
message) and BA list of 3G broadcasted on SACCH (described in
measurement information message). This difference is to correspond
to BA_USED data in measurement report and to display list of reported
adjacent cells. Parameters in SI 2quater message and measurement
information message are in reverse for the convenience of regulations.
Value range: 0 ~ 1
0: 0 on BCCH (system message 2quater) and 1 on SACCH
(measurement information message)
1: 1 on BCCH (system message 2quater) and 0 on SACCH
(measurement information message)
Default value: 0
16. Whether to permit UE to report field strength of NCC allowed, but BCC
invalid cell (InvldBSICRprtCS)
Description: Some NCCs in BSIC of GSM cell are allowed by NCC
system, but valid for BCC (that means it is not configured in the
system). This parameter is to control whether the system to allow UE
to report field strength of such cell
Value range; True: Enabling; False: Disabling
Default value: True
17. Whether UE is able to search 3G adjacent cells in frames requiring
BSIC decoding (SearchPrioCS3G)
Description: Whether UE is able to search 3G adjacent cells in frames
requiring BSIC decoding (SearchPrioCS3G). UE can use 25 frames at
most to search in 13 seconds, if allowed
Value range: True: Enabling; False: Disabling
Default value: True
18. Signal Level Offset when GSM900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtOffsetCS900)
Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
900_REPORTING_OFFSET first when reporting GSM900M adjacent cells,
if there are two cells whose signal levels are higher than or equal to
900_REPORTING_THRESHOLD, and have same REP_PRIORITY
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding to 0 ~ 42 db, 6db for each class
Default value: 0

188 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

19. Signal level threshold when GSM900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtThoCS900)
Description: It can report GSM900M adjacent cells only when signals of
the cell are higher than or equal to 900_REPORTING_THRESHOLD
(without dimension, corresponding to RXLEV in measurement report,
and mapping relations differ with RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting
in a period depends on signal level, REP_PRIORITY,
MULTIBAND_REPORTING and 900_REPORTING_OFFSET.
Value range: 0: always; 1 ~ 6: corresponding to 6 ~ 36, and 6 for
each class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0
20. Signal level offset when GSM1800M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtOffsetCS1800)
Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
1800_REPORTING_OFFSET first when reporting GSM900M adjacent
cells, if there are two cells whose signal levels are higher than or equal
to 1800_REPORTING_THRESHOLD, and have same REP_PRIORITY
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding to 0 ~ 42 db, 6 db for every class
Default value: 0
21. Signal level threshold when GSM1800M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtThoCS1800)
Description: It can report GSM900M adjacent cells only when signals in
the cell are higher than or equal to 1800_REPORTING_THRESHOLD
(without dimension, corresponding to RXLEV in measurement report,
and mapping relations differ with RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting
in a period depends on signal level, REP_PRIORITY,
MULTIBAND_REPORTING and 1800_REPORTING_OFFSET.
Value range: 0: Always; 1 ~ 6: Corresponding to 6 ~ 36, 6 for every
class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0
22. Signal level offset when GSM1900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtOffsetCS1900)
Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
1800_REPORTING_OFFSET first when reporting GSM900M adjacent
cells, if there are two cells whose signal levels are higher than or equal
to 1800_REPORTING_THRESHOLD, and have same REP_PRIORITY
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding to 0 ~ 42 db, 6 db for every class
Default value: 0
23. Signal level threshold when GSM1900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtThoCS1900)
Description: It can report GSM900M adjacent cells only when signals in
the cell are higher than or equal to 1800_REPORTING_THRESHOLD
(without dimension, corresponding to RXLEV in measurement report,
and mapping relations differ with RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting
in a period depends on signal level, REP_PRIORITY,
MULTIBAND_REPORTING and 1800_REPORTING_OFFSET.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 189


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Value range: 0: Always; 1 ~ 6: Corresponding to 6 ~ 36, 6 for every


class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0
24. Signal level offset when WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells select to report
(FDDRprtOffsetCS)
Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
FDD_REPORTING_OFFSET first when reporting WCDMA/FDD adjacent
cells, if there are two cells whose signals are higher than or equal to
FDD_REPORTING_THRESHOLD, and have same REP_PRIORITY
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding 0 ~ 42 db, 6 db for every class
Default value: 0
25. Signal level threshold when WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells select to report
(FDDRprtThoCS)
Description: It can report WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells only when
signals in the cell are higher than or equal to
FDD_REPORTING_THRESHOLD (without dimension, corresponding to
RXLEV in measurement report, and mapping relations differ with
RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting in a period depends on signal
level, REP_PRIORITY, FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING and
FDD_REPORTING_OFFSET.
Value range: 0: Always; 1 ~ 6: Corresponding to 6 ~ 36, 6 for every
class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0

GPRS Property Parameters


1. Increased offset PS when UE reports signal field strength (ScaleOrdPs)
Description: Increased offset PS when UE reports signal field strength.
UE maps n+ ScaleOrdCS to the value that original n corresponds to
when mapping to RXLEV (0 ~ 63), if actual field strength of one GSM
adjacent cell is only n dbm. It is only applicable to enhanced
measurement report message. UE reports actual value by setting this
parameter if field strength of adjacent cell is over 48 dbm. UE will
report value of SCALE used in reported packet enhanced
measurement report message. UE will use the value of best signal
level to report if SCALE_ORD = 2.
Value range: 0: 0 db; 1: 10 db; 2; Automatic, determined by UE
Default value: 0
2. Message type that UE reports measurement report (ReportTypePs)
Description: This parameter is to indicate that UE adopts
PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT or
PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT message to report
measurement report.
Value range:
When configuring PBCCH

190 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

0: Using PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT to report


measurement report; 1: Using PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT to
report measurement report
When not configuring PBCCH:
0: Using PACKET ENHANCED MEASUREMENT REPORT to report
measurement report if configuring at least one BSIC for each frequent
point in BA (GPRS) list. Otherwise, use
PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT to report measurement report; 1:
Using PACKET MEASUREMENT REPORT to report measurement report
Default value: 1
3. Adjacent cells in same frequency band in measurement report
(SvrBandRprtPS)
Description: Max adjacent cells in same frequency band as service cell
in grouping measurement report or strongest cells list
Value range: 0 ~ 3
Default value: 2
4. Types of 3G adjacent cells reported in measurement report
(FDDRepQntPS)
Description: Types of 3G adjacent cells reported in grouping
measurement report
Value range: 0: Receiving power of CPICH channel scrambling of this
3G cell in UE, with the unit of dbm; 1: Ec/No, ratio of receiving power
and hot noise of CPICH channel scrambling, with the unit of db
Default value: 0
5. Frequency of adjacent cell to report measurement report
(ReportRatePS)
Description: Frequency of adjacent cell to report measurement report
Value range: 0: Normal; 1: Low
Default value: 0
6. WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells in measurement report (FDDMulRatRrptPS)
Description: Max WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells in grouping measurement
report or strongest cells list. Leave spare places for GSM adjacent cells
if WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells reported are not enough (leave for TDD
cells if supporting TDD technology)
Value range: 0 ~ 3
Default value: 2
7. Whether to permit UE to report field strength of NCC allowed, but BCC
invalid cell (InvldBSICRprtPS)
Description: Some NCCs in BSIC of GSM cell are allowed by NCC
system, but valid for BCC (that means it is not configured in the
system). This parameter is to control whether the system to allow UE
to report field strength of such cell
Value range: True: Enabling; False: Disabling

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 191


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

8. Whether UE is able to search 3G adjacent cells in frames requiring


BSIC decoding (SearchPrioPS3G)
Description: Whether UE is able to search 3G adjacent cells in frames
requiring BSIC decoding (SearchPrioCS3G). UE can use 25 frames at
most to search in 13 seconds, if allowed
Value range: True: Enabling; False: Disabling
9. Signal Level Offset when GSM900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtOffsetPS900)
Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
RprtOffsetPS900 first when reporting GSM900M adjacent cells, if there
are two cells whose signal levels are higher than or equal to
900RprtThoPS, and have same RepPrioPS
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding to 0 ~ 42 db, 6db for each class
Default value:0
10. Signal Level Threshold when GSM900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtThoPS900)
Description: It can report GSM900M adjacent cells only when signals of
the cell are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS900 (without dimension,
corresponding to RXLEV in measurement report, and mapping relations
differ with RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting in a period depends on
signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and RprtOffsetPS900
Value range: 0: Always; 1 ~ 6: corresponding to 6 ~ 36, 6 for every
class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0
11. Signal level offset when GSM1800M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtOffsetPS1800)
Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
FDD_REPORTING_OFFSET first when reporting GSM900Madjacent cells,
if there are two cells whose signals are higher than or equal to
RprtThoPS1800, and have same RepPrioPS
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding to 0 ~ 42 db, 6 db for each class
Default value: 0
12. Signal level threshold when GSM1800M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtThoPS1800)
Description: It can report GSM900M adjacent cells only when signals of
the cell are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS1800 (without dimension,
corresponding to RXLEV in measurement report, and mapping relations
differ with RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting in a period depends on
signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and RprtOffsetPS1800
Value range: 0: Always; 1 ~ 6: Corresponding to 6 ~ 36, 6 for every
class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0
13. Signal level offset when GSM1900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtOffsetPS1900)

192 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
RprtThoPS1900 first when reporting GSM900M adjacent cells, if there
are two cells whose signals are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS1900,
and have same RepPrioPS
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding to 0 ~ 42 db, 6 db for every class
Default value: 0
14. Signal level threshold when GSM1900M adjacent cells select to report
(RprtThoPS1900)
Description: It can report GSM900M adjacent cells only when signals of
the cell are higher than or equal to RprtThoPS1900 (without dimension,
corresponding to RXLEV in measurement report, and mapping relations
differ with RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting in a period depends on
signal level, RepPrioPS, MulBndRprtPS and RprtOffsetPS1900
Value range: 0: Always; 1 ~ 6: Corresponding to 6 ~ 36, 6 for every
class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0
15. Signal level offset when WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells select to report
(FDDRprtOffsetPS)
Description: Report the cell with larger value of signal level and
RprtThoPS1900 first when reporting WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells, if
there are two cells whose signals are higher than or equal to
FDDRprtThoPS and have same RepPrioPS
Value range: 0 ~ 7, corresponding to 0 ~ 42 db, 6 db for every class
Default value:
16. Signal level threshold when WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells select to report
(FDDRprtThoPS)
Description: It can report WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells only when
signals of the cell are higher than or equal to FDDRprtThoPS (without
dimension, corresponding to RXLEV in measurement report, and
mapping relations differ with RXLEV). Whether to permit reporting in a
period depends on signal level, RepPrioPS, FDDMulRatRrptPS and
FDDRprtOffsetPS
Value range: 0: Always; 1 ~ 6: Corresponding to 6 ~ 36, 6 for every
class; 7: , indicating never (it will never be over )
Default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 193


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

3G Handover Control Parameters


1. Cell 3G Handover Control No. (Ho3GId)
Value range: 1
2. 3G Handover Failure Penalty Period (HoFailPenalTm3G)
Description: A period of protection time to prevent immediate
handover after failure, with the unit of period for measurement or
measurement report pretreatment
Value range: 1 ~ 255
Default value: 7
3. Slippery window value used when BSC counts Ec/No or average value
of RSCP of 3G adjacent cells (HoWindow3G)
Description: Slippery window value used when BSC counts Ec/No or
average value of RSCP of 3G adjacent cells
Value range: 1 ~ 31
Default value: 6
4. Permitted zeroes in 3G adjacent cells measurement value
(ZeroAllowed3G)
Description: MS can only report measurement results of six strongest
adjacent cells at one time, according to GSM specifications. Therefore,
measurement results of adjacent cells recorded by BCC may not be
continuous. BCC records missing measurement data as 0 (indicating
less than -110dBm). 0 may have bad effect on average counting and
they can be left out when counting the average. Display of too many 0
may indicate that signals in this adjacent cell is too bad. ZeroAllowed
applies to average counting and it is normal for 0 to display, no matter
how many times. They can all be left out. Reliability of sample value is
low if 0 appears over ZeroAllowed during the average counting.
Measurement average = Total of reported values/NcellWindow.
Reliability of sample value ishigh if 0 appears less than ZeroAllowed in
reported values. Measurement values = Total reported
values/(NCellWindow Zeroes)
Value range: 0 ~ 31
Default value: 1
5. Control value whether to support handover between systems inside
BSC (InterSysHoCtrl)
Description: Control value whether to support handover between
systems inside BSC, controlling hand in and hand out simultaneously
Value range: True: Enabling; False: Disabling
6. RSCP threshold of handover from GSM to 3G (HoRSCPThs3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G initiates and the adjacent cell
can be as destination candidate cell for handover, when at least
3GHoRSCP_N average value of RSCP are reserved for a 3G adjacent
cell in BSC, and when at least 3GHoRSCP_P are over or equal to
3GHoRSCPThs in latest 3GHoRSCP_N RSCP average values of RSCP

194 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Value range: 0 ~ 63
Default value: 35
7. P of RSCP during handover from GSM to 3G (HoRSCP_P_3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G initiates when at least
3G_HO_RSCP_P are over or equal to 3G_HO_RSCP_THS in the average
value of 3G_HO_RSCP_N RSCP
Value range: 0 ~ 63
Default value: 35
8. N of RSCP during handover from GSM to 3G (HoRSCP_N_3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G initiates when at least
3G_HO_RSCP_P are over or equal to 3G_HO_RSCP_THS in the average
value of 3G_HO_RSCP_N RSCP
Value range: 0 ~ 63
Default value: 35
9. Ec/NO threshold during handover from GSM to 3G (HoEcNoThs3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G initiates and the adjacent cell
can be as destination candidate cell for handover, when at least
3G_HO_ Ec/No_N average value of Ec/No are reserved for a 3G
adjacent cell in BSC, and when at least 3G_HO_ Ec/No _P are over or
equal to 3G_HO_ Ec/No _THS in latest 3G_HO_ Ec/No _N average
values of RSCP
Value range: 0 ~ 49
Default value: 25
10. P of Ec/NO during handover from GSM to 3G (HoEcNo_P_3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G initiates when at least
3G_HO_Ec/No_P are over or equal to 3G_HO_Ec/No_THS in the
average value of 3G_HO_Ec/No_N Ec/No
Value range: 0 ~ 49
Default value: 25
11. N of Ec/NO during handover from GSM to 3G (HoEcNo_N_3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G initiates when at least
3G_HO_Ec/No_P are over or equal to 3G_HO_Ec/No_THS in the
average value of 3G_HO_Ec/No_N Ec/No
Value range: 0 ~ 49
Default value: 25

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 195


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

3G Adjacent Cell Reselection


Parameters
1. 3G adjacent cells reselection object No. (AC3GId)
Value range: 1 ~ 32
2. Priority when reporting measurement report (PS) (RepPrioPS)
Description: Priority of adjacent cells to report measurement reports
Value range: 0: Low; 1: High
Default value: o

3G Handover Cell Parameters


1. 3G adjacent cells handover object No. (AC3GId)
Value range: 33 ~ 66
2. RSCP offset during handover to this 3G adjacent cell (HoRSCPOffset3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G indicates that 3G adjacent cells
meet lowest requirements of UE normal communication. Parameter
3GHoRSCPOffset is necessary condition for handover, that is, 3G
adjacent cell can be destination cell only when meeting the requirment
that average of current RSCP is larger than or equal to
HoRSCPThs3G+3GHoRSCPOffset3G. This parameter is to ensure
uplink/downlink of 3G adjacent cells to provide enough field strength
and to control the priority of one UE to hand over to different adjacent
cells
Value range: 0 ~ 63
Default value: 5
3. Ec/No offset during handover to this 3G adjacent cell (HoEcNoOffset3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G indicates that 3G adjacent cells
meet lowest requirements of UE normal communication. Parameter
3GhoEcNoOffset is necessary condition for handover, that is, 3G
adjacent cell can be destination cell only when meeting the requirment
that average of current RSCP is larger than or equal to HoEcNoThs3G
+hoEcNoOffset3G. This parameter is to ensure uplink/downlink of 3G
adjacent cells to provide enough field strength and to control the
priority of one UE to hand over to different adjacent cells
Value range: 0 ~ 49
Default value: 5
4. Priority of adjacent cells to repot measurement report (RepPrioCS)
Description: Priority of adjacent cells to repot measurement report.
Order:

196 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Chapter 4 - Cell Object Parameters

Adjacent cells in same frequency band as service cell, which meet


following features:
Color code BSIC is valid
Measured field strength is at top place of all cells with same
frequency band (first several depend on
SERVING_BAND_REPORTING), larger than or equal to lower limit
specified in XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD (XXX represents
frequency band of service cell)
Adjacent cells in different frequency band from service cell, which
meet following features:
Color code is BSIC is valid
Measured field strength is at top place of all cells with same
frequency band (first several depend on MULTIBAND_REPORTING),
larger than or equal to lower limit specified in
XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD (XXX represents a frequency band
different form that of service cell)
Cells of other access technologies: like WCDMA/FDD adjacent cells,
which meet following features:
Scrambling of the cell is correct
Measured field strength is at top place of all access technologies,
like WCDMA/FDD (first several depend on
XXX_MULTIRAT_REPORTING), larger than or equal to lower limit
specified in XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD (XXX represents access
technology, like WCDMA/FDD)
Report frequency is rather low, at least once in four times, if
REP_PRIORITY and REPORTING_RATE are low, in GSM adjacent
cells with valid BSIC, or with NCC permission but with invalid BCC
(if permitted), or with valid other access technologies
Notes for above priorities:
Leave spare spaces for adjacent cells with next priority level if
there are
Cells with access technologies or high frequency band
REP_PRIORITY are prior when meeting requirements
The cell with larger value of XXX_REPORTING_THRESHOLD and
XXX_REPORTING_OFFSET is prior, when REP_PRIORITY of them
are same
Value range: 0: Low; 1: High
Default value: 0
5. DN of relevant 3G external cell
Description: DN of 3G external cell under this BSS
Value range: 1 ~ 65535

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 197


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

3G Handover and Reselection


Parameters
1. 3G adjacent cell handover reselection object No. (AC3GId)
Value range: 65 ~ 96
2. RSCP offset to hand over to this 3G adjacent cell (HoRSCPOffset3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G indicates that 3G adjacent cells
meet lowest requirements of UE normal communication. Parameter
3GHoRSCPOffset is necessary condition for handover, that is, 3G
adjacent cell can be destination cell only when meeting the requirment
that average of current RSCP is larger than or equal to
3GHoRSCPThs+3GHoRSCPOffset. This parameter is to ensure
uplink/downlink of 3G adjacent cells to provide enough field strength
and to control the priority of one UE to hand over to different adjacent
cells
Value range: 0 ~ 63
Default value: 5
3. Ec/No offset to hand over to this 3G adjacent cell (HoEcNoOffset3G)
Description: Handover from GSM to 3G indicates that 3G adjacent cells
meet lowest requirements of UE normal communication. Parameter
3GhoEcNoOffset is necessary condition for handover, that is, 3G
adjacent cell can be destination cell only when meeting the requirment
that average of current EcNo is larger than or equal to 3GHoEcNoThs
+3GhoEcNoOffset. This parameter is to ensure uplink/downlink of 3G
adjacent cells to provide enough field strength and to control the
priority of one UE to hand over to different adjacent cells
Value range: 0 ~ 49
Default value: 5
4. Report priority of adjacent cell report measurement (RepPrioCS)
Description: See priority of adjacent cell report measurement report in
3G handover cell parameter (RepPrioCS)
Value range: 0 ~ 1
Default value: 0
5. Report priority when reporting measurement report (PS) (RepPrioPS)
Description: See priority of adjacent cell report measurement report in
3G adjacent cell reselection parameter (RepPrioPS)
Value range: 0 ~ 1
Default value: 0
6. Relevant 3G external cell
Description: DN of 3G external cell under this BSS
Value range: 1 ~ 65535

198 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Figures

Figure 1 Main Interface................................................................................ 17


Figure 2 Illustration for Two Clocks to Control Cell Flow ................................... 41

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 199


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

This page is intentionally blank.

200 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Tables

Table 1 Typographical Conventions .................................................................xi


Table 2 Mouse Operation Conventions .............................................................xi
Table 3 Safety Signs .................................................................................... xii
Table 4 Value Range of LoadValidTime .......................................................... 20
Table 5 Value Table of Load Indication Period ................................................. 21
Table 6 Value Range of OverLevel ................................................................. 21
Table 7 Value Range of ResourceIndThs ........................................................ 23
Table 8 Value Range of Blocking/Unblocking Period ......................................... 24
Table 9 Value Range of Global Resetting Period .............................................. 25
Table 10 Value Range of Protective Period for Handover Request ...................... 26
Table 11 Value Range of Source BSC Handover Execution Period ...................... 26
Table 12 Value Range of Assignment Period ................................................... 27
Table 13 Value Range of Protective Period for Global Resetting ......................... 27
Table 14 Value Range of First Overload Period of Flow Control .......................... 28
Table 15 Value Range of Second Overload Period of Flow Control ...................... 28
Table 16 Value Range of Circuit Resetting Period at BSS Side ........................... 29
Table 17 Value Range of Circuit Group Blocking/unblocking Period .................... 29
Table 18 Value Range of T9101 .................................................................... 30
Table 19 Value RANGE of T9103 ................................................................... 30
Table 20 Value Range of T9104 .................................................................... 31
Table 21 Value Range of T9105 .................................................................... 31
Table 22 Value Range of T9108 .................................................................... 32
Table 23 Value Range of T9113 .................................................................... 32
Table 24 Value Range of zxgT1 ..................................................................... 33
Table 25 Value Range of zxgT2 ..................................................................... 33
Table 26 Value Range of zxgT3 ..................................................................... 34
Table 27 Value Range of zxgT5 ..................................................................... 35
Table 28 Value Range of zxgT6 ..................................................................... 35
Table 29 Value Range of zxgT7 ..................................................................... 36
Table 30 Value Range of zxgT9 ..................................................................... 36
Table 31 Value Range of zxgT10 ................................................................... 37
Table 32 Value Range of zxgT11 ................................................................... 37
Table 33 Value Range of zxgT13 ................................................................... 38
Table 34 Value Range of zxgT1 ..................................................................... 38
Table 35 Value Range of zxgT6 ..................................................................... 39
Table 36 Value Range of rmsTqho ................................................................. 39
Table 37 Value Range of zxgmT7 .................................................................. 40
Table 38 Value Range of Tmirco ................................................................... 41
Table 39 Value Range of T3101 .................................................................... 42
Table 40 Value Range of T3103 .................................................................... 42
Table 41 Value Range of T3107 .................................................................... 43
Table 42 Value Range of T3109 .................................................................... 44
Table 43 Value Range of T3111 .................................................................... 44
Table 44 Value Range of Tbsic ...................................................................... 45
Table 45 Value Range of MS CSMode............................................................. 54
Table 46 Value Range of Cell Frequency Band ................................................ 61
Table 47 Value Range of MS Min RxLev to Access ........................................... 63
Table 48 Value Range of MS Max TxPwr before Network POC ........................... 64
Table 49 Value Range of Offset ..................................................................... 65

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 201


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Table 50 Value Range of Temporary Offset .................................................... 65


Table 51 Values of Penalty Time ................................................................... 66
Table 52 Value Range of Level Threshold ....................................................... 66
Table 53 Value Range of Cell Type ................................................................ 70
Table 54 Value Range of Cell Frequency Band ................................................ 71
Table 55 Value Range of Reselect Hysteresis Power Level ................................ 72
Table 56 Value Range of RbusyThs ................................................................ 73
Table 57 Value Range of MS Get Minimal Intensity When Visit this Cell .............. 76
Table 58 Value Range of RACH Load Indication Threshold ................................ 76
Table 59 Value Range of PCH Load Indication Threshold .................................. 77
Table 60 Value Range of MaxRetrans ............................................................. 77
Table 61 Value Range of MS Max Transmit Power When Access ........................ 78
Table 62 Value Range of AGCH Model Count................................................... 79
Table 63 Value Range of Call Team Account for Multiframe Count ..................... 80
Table 64 Value Range of Most Time Interval of MR Resend at RACH (T3122) ...... 81
Table 65 Value Range of T3212 Timer ........................................................... 83
Table 66 Value Range of Cell Bar Qualify ....................................................... 84
Table 67 Value Range of Cell Reselection Offset (CRO) .................................... 86
Table 68 Value Range of Temp Offset (TO) .................................................... 87
Table 69 Value Range of Penalty Time (PO) .................................................... 88
Table 70 Value Range of Power Offset ........................................................... 89
Table 71 Value Ranges of Assign Remove Mark (Choose, Damage) and HandOver
Remove Mark (Choose, Damage) .......................................................... 90
Table 72 Value Range of FACCH Call Setup .................................................... 91
Table 73 Value Range of Optimize TxPwr ....................................................... 93
Table 74 Value Range of Uplink Best Signal Level ........................................... 94
Table 75 Value Range of Downlink Best Signal Level ....................................... 94
Table 76 Value Range of Up-Downlink Signal Balance ...................................... 95
Table 77 Value Range of Allow Uplink Minimal Signal Level .............................. 95
Table 78 Value Range of Survey Period.......................................................... 96
Table 79 Value Range of Interference Boundaries ........................................... 97
Table 80 Value Range of Level Threshold of Survey RLF ................................... 98
Table 81 Value Range of Quality Threshold of Survey RLF ................................ 99
Table 82 PHY INFO Period During SDCCH Handover ....................................... 100
Table 83 PHY INFO Period During TCH Handover ........................................... 100
Table 84 Value Range of Time Interval of MS Access Attempt after an Access
Failure .............................................................................................. 101
Table85 Value Range of Adjacent Cell Num of Neighbor Band Reported in MultiBand
........................................................................................................ 102
Table 86 Value Range of MS DTX Mode (Broadcast on BCCH) .......................... 103
Table 87 Value Range of MS DTX Mode (Broadcast on SACCH) ........................ 104
Table 88 Values of T200 Timer .................................................................... 104
Table 89 Value range of Whether to Perform Handover Pretreatment and Report
Period ............................................................................................... 105
Table 90 Value Range of Structure Parameter of Common Control Channel (CCCH)
........................................................................................................ 106
Table 91 Value Range of Cell Configuration ................................................... 106
Table 92 Value Range of Encrypt Mode Supported by Cell ............................... 107
Table 93 Value Range of GPRS Cell Reselection Offset .................................... 107
Table 94 Value Range of Cell Reselection Temporary Offset ............................. 108
Table 95 Value Range of Cell Reselection Penalty Time ................................... 108
Table 96 Value Range of Minimal Time Interval of Cell Reselection ................... 109
Table 97 Value Range of Signal Intensity Threshold Value of HCS .................... 109
Table 98 Value Range of GPRS Cell Reselection Hysteresis .............................. 110
Table 99 Value Range of Route Area Reselection Hysteresis. ........................... 111
Table 100 Value Range of Minimal Receiving Level Allowed for MS Access ......... 112
Table 101 Value Range of MS Maximum TxPwr Before Network POC ................. 113
Table 102 Value Range of Offset between Cells with Same LSA Priority ............ 114
Table 103 Value Range of MS Signal Intensity Threshold on High Priority Cell
Reselection ........................................................................................ 115

202 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION


Table 104 Value Range of Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet Idle Mode)
........................................................................................................ 115
Table 105 Value Range of Cell Reselection Survey Report Period (Packet
Transmission Mode) ............................................................................ 116
Table 106 Value Range of NS Survey Report Command .................................. 116
Table 107 Value Range of Network Control Command .................................... 117
Table 108 Value Range of Minimal Time in non-DRX Mode .............................. 117
Table 109 Value Range of MS Extended Survey Command .............................. 118
Table 110 Value range of MS Extended Survey Report Type ............................ 118
Table 111 Value Range of Extended Survey Report Interval Time .................... 119
Table 112 Value Range of T3168 ................................................................. 119
Table 113 Value Range of T3192 ................................................................. 120
Table 114 Value Range of N3102 ................................................................. 121
Table 115 Value Range of Network Operation Mode........................................ 121
Table 116 Value Range of Time Length after Entering Non-Drx Mode................ 122
Table 117 Value Range of Max Blocks Allowed to be Transmitted in Each TS ..... 123
Table 118 Value Range of Package Control Acknowledgement Type Default Format
........................................................................................................ 123
Table 119 Value Range of Access Burst Bit Type ............................................ 123
Table 120 Value Range of Priority Level of Package Access Allowed .................. 125
Table 121 Value Range of Sending Rate ........................................................ 126
Table 122 Value Range of PSI1 Message Repeat Period .................................. 126
Table 123 Value Range of Network Supporting PACKET PSI STATUS Message .... 127
Table 124 Value Range of Blocks distributed to PBCCH in Multiframes .............. 128
Table 125 Value Range of Blocks Allowed to be Kept in Access ........................ 128
Table 126 Value Range of Fixed Blocks for PRACH on PCCCH ........................... 129
Table 127 Value Range of Max Retransmission Times of Each Radio Priority Level
........................................................................................................ 129
Table 128 Value range of Access and Connection Level of Different Radio Priority
Levels ............................................................................................... 130
Table 129 Value Range of Min TS Interval of Adjacent Channel Requirement ..... 131
Table 130 Value Range of TS Number of Trans. Random Access ...................... 132
Table 131 Value Range of MS Power Control Parameter Alpha ......................... 133
Table 132 Value Range of Filter Period of Power in Packet Idle Mode ................ 133
Table 133 Value Range of Filter Period of Power in Packet Transmission Mode ... 134
Table 134 Value Range of PBCCH Power Decrease According to BCCH .............. 134
Table 135 Value Range of Survey Position..................................................... 135
Table 136 Value Range of Filter Const of Interference Signal Power ................. 135
Table 137 TRX Types .................................................................................. 140
Table 138 Threshold Value Range of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Level ................... 145
Table 139 Threshold Value Range of Pwr. INC Due to Downlink Level ............... 146
Table 140 Threshold Value Range of Pwr. DEC due to Uplink Level ................... 146
Table 141 Threshold Value Range of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Level ............... 147
Table 142 Threshold value range of Pwr. INC due to Uplink Quality .................. 147
Table 143 Threshold Value Range of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Quality ............ 148
Table 144 Threshold Value Range of Pwr. DEC Due to Uplink Quality ................ 149
Table 145 Threshold Value Range of Pwr. DEC due to Downlink Quality ............ 149
Table 146 Value Range of MS TxPwr Increase Step ........................................ 151
Table 147 Value Range of MS TxPwr Decrease Step ....................................... 151
Table 148 Value Range of MS Max. TxPwr ..................................................... 152
Table 149 Value Range of MS Min. TxPwr ...................................................... 153
Table 150 Value Range of BS Min. TxPwr ...................................................... 153
Table 151 Value Range of Uplink Power Control Strategy. ............................... 154
Table 152 Value Range of Downlink Power Control Strategy ............................ 154
Table 153 Value Range of Downlink Power Control Mode................................. 154
Table 154 Value Range of Power Decrease Based on BCCH ............................. 155
Table 155 Value Range of Receive Power Strength from MS Needed ................. 155
Table 156 Value Range of Uplink RxLev Level ................................................ 161
Table 157 Value range of Downlink RxLev Threshold ...................................... 162
Table 158 Value Range of Uplink RxQual Threshold ........................................ 163
Table 159 Value Range of Downlink RxQual Level .......................................... 163

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 203


ZXG10-BSS (V2.80) Base Station Subsystem Operation Manual (Radio Parameters)

Table 160 Value Range of Uplink RxLev Threshold of Internal Handover ........... 164
Table 161 Value Range of Downlink RxLev Threshold of Internal Handover ....... 165
Table 162 Value Range of Threshold of C/I Allow to Access Special TRX ............ 165
Table 163 Value Range of Threshold of C/I when Allow Handover From Special TRX
........................................................................................................ 166
Table 164 Value Range of Rapid Handover Level ............................................ 166
Table 165 Value Range of Macro-Micro Handover Level................................... 167
Table 166 Value Range of Distance Handover Level ........................................ 168
Table 167 Value range of Minimum Time Interval .......................................... 168
Table 168 Value Range of Hierarchy Can Use Standard PBGT HO ..................... 169
Table 169 Value Range of Level of Minimal RxLev .......................................... 170
Table 170 Value Range of Handover Method .................................................. 171
Table 171 Value Range of HoControl ............................................................ 171
Table 172 Value Range of Parameter ............................................................ 174
Table 173 Value Range of Adjacent Cell Max TxPwr ........................................ 177
Table 174 Value Range of Min RxLev Needed ................................................ 178
Table 175 Value Range of Cell Layer Num ..................................................... 179
Table 176 Value Range of Cell Layer Num ..................................................... 179
Table 177 Value Range of Minimal PBGT Threshold ........................................ 180
Table 178 Value Range of Minimal Threshold of RxLev HO............................... 180
Table 179 Value Range of Micro Level of Quality Handover .............................. 181
Table 180 Value Range of TS Radio Channel Combination Setting .................... 183
Table 181 Value Range of Sub Time Slot No. ................................................. 184

204 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen